Electrical Sector Solutions Volume 7: Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions
Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial Volume 2—Commercial Distribution Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies Volume 4—Circuit Protection Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection Volume 6—Solid-State Motor Control Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions Tab 1—Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-1 Tab 2—Stacklights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-1 Tab 3—Control Relays and Timers . . . . . . .
Copyright Dimensions, Weights and Ratings Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without notice. Photographs are representative of production units. Terms and Conditions All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice.
Introduction Eaton is a global leader in power distribution, power quality, control and automation, and monitoring products. At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage.
Introduction Icons Green Leaf Eaton Green Solutions are products, systems or solutions that represent Eaton benchmarks for environmental performance. The green leaf symbol is our promise that the solution has been reviewed and documented as offering exceptional, industry-leading environmental benefits to customers, consumers and our communities.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 1.1 10250T Pushbuttons Toggle Switches—E10 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 1.7 1.
1.1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Toggle Switches—E10 Contents Toggle Switches—E10 Description 1 Page Toggle Switches—E10 Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Toggle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hesitation Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Toggle Switches—E10 1.1 Standards and Certifications ● ● 1 UL Recognized CSA—File No. LR40068 1 1 1 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Toggle Switches—E10 Series Not to be used for ordering purposes 1 E10 T 1 06 A S = E10T106AS Series Lever Length T = 0.563 in (14.3 mm) lever E = 0.688 in (17.
1.1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Toggle Switches—E10 Product Selection Toggle Switches 1 E10 Series—AC Rated—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces 1 Nominal AC Ratings Amperes 1 1 125V Single-Pole 50V UP Position CENTER Position DOWN Position— Keyway Screw Terminal Catalog Number 0.250 in (6.4 mm) Spade Terminal Catalog Number Solder Lug Catalog Number 1 P.S.T.
1.1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Toggle Switches—E10 Hesitation Switches Heavy-Duty Hesitation Switch 1 E10 Series—Special Purpose—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces Nominal Ratings 1 Function—Circuit with Lever In… Amperes hp 28 Vdc 125 Vac 250 Vac 250 Vac 15 15 10 3/4 Operation UP Position CENTER Position DOWN Position— Keyway Poles and Throw 1 Screw Terminal Catalog Number Maintained ON OFF ON 2 P.D.T. E10E215SS 3 P.D.T. E10E315SS 4 P.D.T.
1.1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Toggle Switches—E10 1 Technical Data and Specifications 1 Toggle Switches Description Specification 1 AC ratings 6–20A, 125 Vac 3–10A, 250 Vac Max.
1.1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Toggle Switches—E10 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Toggle Switch Dimensions Lever Length B Screw Terminals Operation Bushing Length A C D E C1 D E C D E 1 Momentary and maintained 0.47 (11.9) 0.56 (14.2) 1.00 (25.4) 1.17 (29.7) 0.63 (16.0) 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) 0.63 (16.0) 1.00 (25.4) 1.13 (28.7) 0.63 (16.0) 2 Maintained 0.47 (11.9) 0.56 (14.2) 1.06 (26.9) 1.31 (33.3) 0.75 (19.1) 1.19 (30.2) 1.31 (33.3) 0.
1.2 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E Contents Toggle Switches—E10E Description 1 Page Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E Product Selection Molded-In Screw Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . Econoswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E 1.
1.
1.2 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Single-Pole Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series 0.432 (10.97) 1 Two-Pole Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series 1 0.432 (10.97) 0.076 (1.93) 1 0.076 (1.93) 1 Keyway 1 Keyway 1 33° 16.5° 33° 16.5° 0.240 (6.10) Dia. 0.690 (17.53) 1 0.240 (6.10) Dia. 0.470 (11.94) 15/32-32 UN-2A Thread to Within 0.060 (1.52) of Shoulder 1.18 (29.9) Max. 0.250 (6.
1.2 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Single-Pole Econoswitch E10E Series 0.432 (10.97) 1 Keyway 0.076 (1.93) 1 1 33° 16.5° 0.240 (6.10) Dia. 1 0.690 (17.53) 1 1 1 0.470 (11.94) 15/32-32 UN-2A Thread to Within 0.060 (1.52) of Shoulder 1 1.51 (38.4) Max. 1.28 (32.5) Max. 1.30 (33.0) Max. 1 1 #6-32 UNC-2A Terminal Screw, SEMS 0.250 x 0.032 (6.35) x (0.81) Thick 0.125 (3.17) Dia. Hole 1.25 (31.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E 1.2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Switch Guard 1 33° 0.240 (6.10) Dia. 1 0.688 (17.48) 0.840 (21.34) 1 1 0.468 (11.89) 15/32-32 UN-2A Thread to Within 0.060 (1.52) of Shoulder 1 1 0.475 (12.07) Dia. Rivet 1 0.031 0.062 (0.79) (1.57) 0.750 (19.05) Max. 1 0.688 (17.48) Max. 1 1 1.062 (26.97) 1.635 (41.53) Max. 1.830 (46.48) Max. 1 1 1.547 (39.29) Rad. Open 1 Closed Red-Molded Plastic 1 1 1.
1.3 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Contents Pushbutton Control Stations Description 1 Page Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection M22 Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . Commercial Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . . Special Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . . 10250H Series Heavy-Duty Control Stations . . . . .
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled 1.
1.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled 1.3 Commercial Control Stations 1 Available Catalog Numbers Key Specifications ● ● ● ● ● ● 30.5 mm (10250T series) operators ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc enclosures Industrial grade UL® Type 4, 4X, 12, 13 Single 3/4 in NPT conduit entrance Dimensions—in (mm) ● Enclosure: 3.88 W x 4.00 H x 3.00 D (98.6 x 101.6 x 76.3) ● Operator: 1.63 D (to enclosure) x 1.50 diameter (41.4 x 38.
1.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled 1.3 Type N Control Stations—Open Type Construction (No Cover) Contact Symbol Selector Switch Button Type/Color Legends Catalog Number RUN/OFF/AUTO 10250H2538 1 1 One Element Enclosure Type Three-position selector switch/black knob 1 1 1 Two Button Station Two Element Enclosure Type Flush/green START/STOP 1 10250H2747 1 1 Mechanically Interlocked Pushbuttons Flush/black (all) mech.
1.
1.3 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled 10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations 1 Complete Assembled Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13 Element Type Break Glass Station 1 Features Contact Block(s) Legend Gray enclosure NC (logic level) EMERG.
1.3 1 Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Class I Division 2 10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled 1.3 Class I Division 2 E34 Series Corrosion Resistant 30.
1.3 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Custom Assembled Stations Specification Form Ordering Instructions 1 1 1 1 1 Step 1 Copy this ordering guide from catalog. Step 2 Specify 10250T or E34 pushbutton lines in the corresponding box on the following page. Step 7 Fax Sheet 2 of this form to Eaton’s TRC, Technical Resource Center, at 828-6510549 to the attention of— Custom Stations Order or email to TRC@eaton.com.
1.3 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled To — Eaton’s TRC, Custom Station Order (828) 651-0549 FAX, or email to TRC@eaton.
1.3 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Renewal Parts Type N Renewal Parts 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Assembled Stations—Type N 1 1 1 Item No. No. Req. Part Number Type N—Square Buttons 1 1 1 Description Cover Item No. Description No. Req.
1.3 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Assembled Stations—Type N, continued Item No. No. Req. Description Part Number Type N—Square Buttons, continued 17 Item No. Description 1 No. Req.
1.3 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Technical Data and Specifications Ratings 1 1 Maximum Ampere Ratings for Type N Control Stations Volts AC 110 Volts DC 1 Description 220 440 550 120 240 600 Make and emergency interrupt capacity 30 15 7.5 6 1.0 0.5 0.1 1 Normal load break 3 1.5 0.75 0.6 1.0 0.5 0.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled 1.3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Type H Control Stations 1 NEMA Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 13 1 No. of Elements Dimensions Wide High Deep 1 and 2 4.50 (114.3) 8.25 (209.6) 4.50 (114.3) 3 4.50 (114.3) 10.75 (273.1) 4.25 (108.0) 1 1 1 10250T and E34 1 Approximate Enclosure Dimensions Surface Mounting Number of Elements Dimensions in In (mm) 4 Mtg.
1.4 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Contents 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Description 1 Page 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated, Illuminated and Keyed . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 1.
1.4 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 1.
1.4 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Indicating Lights Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 1.4 Emergency Stops 1 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.4 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated, Illuminated and Keyed Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 1.4 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.4 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Q18S1-BL 1.
1.4 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 02SQ25 Insert Plate SQT11 Size 10 x 22 mm Q25TS-X BLANK 1.
1.4 1 Button Plates 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.
1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.
1.4 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 RMQ-16, continued Specification Description Unit Pushbutton Operators (Maintained) Selector Switches Key-Released Operators Emergency Stop Operators Emergency Stop Operators (Illuminated) 1 1 General Technical Data 1 Lifespan, mechanical (operations) x 105 30 (3) 3 3 0.5 0.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 1.4 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in mm [in] 1 Actuating and Indicator Elements Square Style Q…BS M16 x 1 1 18.0 [0.71] 1 1 1 39.0 [1.54] Ø25.0 [0.98] Ø18.0 [0.71] 4.0 [0.16] Q…D-_, Q…DR-_ 1 24.0 [0.94] Q…S_ 1 Q…WK_ 1 1 1 39.0 [1.54] 39.0 [1.54] 11.0 [0.43] 39.0 [1.54] 17.0 [0.67] 1 26.0 [1.02] 1 13.0 [0.51] 1 Q…LT-_, Q…LTR-_, Q…LF-_ Q…LH-_ Q…LWK_ 1 1 1 49.0 [1.93] 49.0 [1.93] 11.0 [0.43] 16.0 [0.
1.4 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Approximate Dimensions in mm [in] Front Fixing Q18, Q25, E89, SRA, VS, M16 18.0 [0.71] E01, E10 ISH 2.8 [0.11] 1 1 1 49.0 [1.93] 6.0 [0.24] 58.0 [2.28] 1 1 1 Drilling Dimensions Grid Dimension to IEC/EN 60947 Minimum Grid Spacing Dimension Mounting Distance Drilling Q25 Q18 Mounting 18.0 [0.71] 1 25.0 [0.98] 1 1 16.2 [0.64] + 0.2 0 1 1 18.0 [0.71] 25.0 [0.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Contents 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Description Page 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coding Adapter Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 1 ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 1 1 1 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Features 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights ● Benefits Field convertible pushbuttons and mushroom operators from maintained to momentary status Field convertible selector switches from momentary to maintained operation and vice versa LED offering only for all illuminated operators Laser engraved pushbuttons, lenses and enclosures Heavy-duty construction with a minimum of IP66 and UL NEMA® type 4X / 13 on front of panel operators.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.
1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 M22-_ 1.5 Point-of-Purchase Units 1 Color Type Contact Configuration 1 Catalog Number Black Flush momentary NO/NC M22-D-S-K11-P Red Extended momentary NO/NC M22-DH-R-K11-P Green Flush momentary NO/NC M22-D-G-K11-P Red Ext. illuminated (12–30V) momentary NO/NC M22-DLH-R-K11-R-P Red Ext.
1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Contents Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Description 1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Non-Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.5 1 1 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 1 M22-DRH-W 1 M22S-DRH-W 1 1 1 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
1.5 1 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 1 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Indicating Lights Product Description 1 1 1 1 Features Eaton’s M22 indicating lights use the combination of a durable, bright LED unit and modern lenses designed specifically for this type of LED to create a bright and visible indicating light. As with the pushbuttons, the indicating light lenses can be laser engraved. Indicating lights can be ordered as complete devices, including lens and LED unit, or as modular components.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Indicating Lights, Flush 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Emergency Stops Product Description Features Eaton’s M22 emergency stops are a durable and reliable solution to a variety of e-stop applications. With standard push-pull, as well as twist-to-release and keyrelease, illuminated options and red or black operators, the M22 e-stop is a robust solution.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.
1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Emergency Stops 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Contents Selector Switches Description 1 Selector Switches Non-Illuminated Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Non-Illuminated Selector Switches 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Illuminated Selector Switches 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
1.5 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Key-Operated Selector Switches 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Mushroom Head Pushbuttons Product Description Features Eaton’s M22 mushroom head operators are a durable and unique way to include standard pushbutton functionality. Like the standard pushbutton line, the maintained pushbuttons are field convertible to momentary. They also offer laser engraving and a robust five million mechanical operations on the standard momentary operator.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Momentary 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Maintained 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Double Pushbuttons Product Description Features ● 1 Eaton’s M22 double pushbutton line is perfect for applications such as motor and pump starting, as well as anytime space is limited. In addition to the two buttons that fit in one 22 mm hole is the integrated white indicating light between them. These three operators allow for multiple functions to occur in a single space.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.
1.5 1 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Double Pushbuttons 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Four-Way Pushbuttons Product Description Features Eaton’s M22 four-way pushbutton is a truly unique offering. A four-way pushbutton offers four different buttons mounted in a single 22 mm hole. This is ideal not only for an application with limited space, but also directional applications (when ordered with the four arrow engraving option).
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Product Selection 1 Four-Way Pushbuttons, Momentary 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator.
1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Joysticks Product Description Features Eaton’s M22 joystick line comes in a wide variety of options. From vertical and horizontal two-position switches to the maintained four-position, these operators fit a variety of applications. An additional option, two switch points, allows for eight isolated circuits to be actuated individually on a single operator.
1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Joysticks 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 1 M22-K10 Joystick with Double Contact Contact Blocks 12 Terminal Type Contact Configuration 3 Catalog Number Screw NO NO, early-make NC NC, late-break NO NC NC, late-break 2NO 2NC NO-NC M22-K10 M22-K10P M22-K01 M22-K01D M22-CK10 M22-CK01 M22-CK01D M22-CK20 M22-CK02 M22-CK11 Spring-cage Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Potentiometers Acoustic Devices Product Description Product Description Eaton’s M22 potentiometers allow for a ready to use operator in a conveniently sized package. M22 potentiometers include the resistive element, instead of just a knob, and a built in legend surrounding the knob. The slim design, with integrated contacts and the range of resistances available, allows for a quick install.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Through-the-Door Operators Bulkhead Interfaces Product Description Product Description Eaton’s M22 through-the-door operators use the same familiar flush pushbutton look with the addition of a cut-to-length rod that allows for a simple reset operator. Eaton’s M22 bulkhead interfaces are another unique offering in the M22 line.
1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 ASi Adapter Modules Product Description 1 1 1 1 Eaton’s M22 ASi adapter modules add functionality to every operator in the M22 line. These devices can be connected to any operator that uses contact blocks or LED units. The simple snapon design allows for a quick integration of an entire application of operators to a communicating network.
1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Palm Switches Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. Palm Switches, Type 4X/13 Enclosure Product Description Eaton’s M22 palm switches are an oversized button that mount directly to an enclosure base. This allows for a standalone button that can be mounted anywhere.
1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.
1.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 M22-LED-W Light Units Terminal Type Mounting Location Screw Front 1 LED Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number White Red 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-LED-W M22-LED-R Green Blue White Red Green Blue White Red Green Base Blue White Red Green Blue White Red Green Blue Spring-cage Front Base M22-XLED60 1.
1.5 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Legend Plate Holders and Inserts, Pushbuttons and Double Pushbuttons 2 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights M22S-ST-X 1 Description Inscription Catalog Number Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert, for pushbuttons Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert, for double pushbuttons — M22S-ST-X — M22S-STDD-X Legend plate insert — Custom STOP START M22-XST M22-XST-ETCH 1 M22-XST-GB0 M22-XST-GB1 OFF ON RUN FAULT OFF ON MAN. AUTO MAN.
1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Legend Plates, Complete 2 M22S-ST-GB0 For use with pushbuttons and indicating lights Selector switches M22-XZK Emergency-stop operators 1 Description Inscription Catalog Number Legend plate holder with insert STOP START OFF ON RUN FAULT M22S-ST-GB0 M22S-ST-GB1 M22S-ST-GB5 M22S-ST-GB6 M22S-ST-GB7 M22S-ST-GB8 1 1 2 OFF ON M22S-ST-X52 M22S-ST-X53 M22S-ST-GB10 1 MAN. AUTO MAN.
1.5 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 M22-XGPV M22G-XGPV 1.
1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
1.5 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Contact Blocks and Light Units Contact Blocks LED Light Units IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 UL #E29184 IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 UL #E29184 x 10 6 >5 >3600 — Description General Standards 1 Lifespan, mechanical Operations Operating frequency Operations/h 1 Actuating force n >5 — Operating torque (screw terminals) Nm <0.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Palm Switches Description Momentary Maintained FAK-R-V-KC11-I IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 x 10 6 >1 >3600 >0.1 >600 >0.
1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Operators and Indicating Lights 1 Ø 1.16 (29.5) Ø 1.17 (29.7) M22 x 0.06 (1.5) 1 1 1.17 (29.7) 1 0.04 (1)–0.24 (6) 1 0.39 (10) 0.75 (19) 1 Pushbuttons Selector Switches Operators M22…-D-_ M22…-DH-_ M22…-W-_ 1 M22…-WL-_ 1 1 1 1 0.39 (10) 0.65 (16.4) M22-DG(L)-_ 0.93 (23.7) 1.06 (26.9) 1 M22…-DD-_ 1 M22…-W(R)S-_ 1 1 Ø1.17 (29.7) 2.15 (54.7) Ø1.17 (29.
1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Illuminated Pushbuttons Contact Block Mounting Adapter M22…-DL-_ M22-A_ M22…-DLH_ M22S-A… 0.85 (21.5) 1.77 (45) 1 1 0.76 (19.3) 1 1.73 (44) 1 1 1 1 Mushroom Head Pushbutton Front Mounted Centering Adapter M22…-DP-_ M22-ZA 0.84 (21.4) 1 0.65 (16.4) Ø1.44 (36.5) 1 1.18 (30) 0.39 (10) 1 1 1 1 0.93 (23.6) 0.7 (17.
1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Front Mounted Mounting Plate DIN-Rail Mounting Adapter 1 M22-E_ M22-D... M22-L... M22-W... M22-P... 0.12 (3.1) M22-D_ M22-L_ M22-W_ M22-P_ M22-TCV 1 2.2 (56) 0.12 (3) 1 a1 0.18 (4.5 (M4)) M22-TC 1 0.1 (2.5) 1.3 (33) e Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights with M22-TC Telescopic Clip and M22-TVC Extension 1 1 1 1.39 (35.2) 2.23 (56.7) 1 4 x M4 x 16 2.83 (72) 2.15 (54.5) 0.
1.5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Covers Legend Plates M22-H_ M22S-ST-_ 1 M20 2.32 (59) 1 1 M22S-STDD-X 3.74 (95) a2 M20 1.85 (47) 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.38 (35) 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights M20 0.59 (15) 1.18 (30) Catalog Number a2 Cable Entry Style 1.65 (42) 2.95 (75) 4.25 (108) 5.55 (141) 6.85 (174) 8.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Grid Dimension to IEC/EN 60947 1 Grid Dimension for M22-DD_ 1 1 1 1.97 (50) 1 1 2.95 (75) 2.48 (63) 1 1 1 1.18 (30) 1 1 Grid Dimension for Various Combinations 1 1 B 1.18 (30) Grid Dimension for M22-DDL_ 1 a 1.18 (30) 1 1 Pushbutton Diaphragm M22-T-DD 1 B> M22(S)-_(IEC/EN 60947) RMQ-Titan min.
1.5 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Blanking Plugs Emergency Stop Legend Plate M22…B-_ M22-XAK_ M22-X(Y)ZK_ 1.16 (29.5) 1 d= 0.03 (0.8) 0.65 (16.5) 1 1 1.97 (50) 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 1.3 (33) M22-T-D 3.54 (90) M22-XBK-_ 5) 2. Ø 0. 1 M22-XYK-_ 0.13 (3.2) (2 1 89 1 1.97 (50) M22-T-D 2.28 (58) 1 Pushbutton Diaphragm 0.67 (17) 1 1 0.49 (12.5) 1 1 1 Ø 2.36 (60) M22-XGWK 0.98 (25) M22…W…J_ 1.97 (50) 3.07 (78) 2.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Symbols Library 1 Instructions for Ordering Laser Inscriptions 1. Identify part number to be inscribed. 1 2. Pick symbol from library and identify suffix code associated with the symbol. 1 3. Order part number already listed in the catalog with -ETCH suffix. 1 4. When placing an order by fax or Vistaline on the Web, reference order item number and indicate appropriate suffix code.
1.5 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Letter Height Specifications: < five characters; letter height = 0.197 in (5 mm). > five characters; letter height = 0.118 in (3 mm).
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Letter Height Specifications: < five characters; letter height = 0.197 in (5 mm). > five characters; letter height = 0.118 in (3 mm).
1.5 1 Inscription 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription X82 Catalog Number Suffix Inscription X104 Catalog Number Suffix Inscription X118 1.
1.5 1 Inscription 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription X202 Catalog Number Suffix Inscription X216 Catalog Number Suffix Inscription X230 1.
1.5 1 Inscription 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix X258 X265 X272 X279 X259 X266 X273 X280 X260 X267 X274 X281 X261 X268 X275 X282 X262 X269 X276 X283 X263 X270 X277 X284 X264 X271 X278 X285 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Text Size: 3 mm—Max.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1.6 Contents 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Description Page 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 1 ● ● 1 1 ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 1 1 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Features 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Benefits Field convertible maintained pushbuttons from maintained to momentary Field convertible selector switches from momentary to maintained operation and vice versa LED offering only for all illuminated operators Laser engraved pushbuttons and lenses Heavy-duty construction with a minimum of IP65 and UL NEMA® Type 4X/13 on front of panel operators.
1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
1.6 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Contents Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Description 1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Non-Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1.6 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.6 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1.
1.6 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.6 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1.
1.6 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1.6 Contents Indicating Lights Description Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating Lights Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1 Catalog Number Selection 1 Indicating Lights Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1.6 Contents Emergency Stops Description Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Stops Non-Illuminated, Twist-Release . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Keyed-Release . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications .
1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1 Catalog Number Selection 1 Emergency Stops Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 C22-PVS_ 1.
1.6 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Contents Selector Switches Description 1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switches Non-Illuminated, Knob Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Key Operated . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1.6 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1 Catalog Number Selection 1 Selector Switches—Keyed Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 C22(S)-WRS-MS_ 1.
1.6 1 C22(S)-WRS…-MS1_ Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.
1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Technical Data and Specifications 1 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Pushbutton Actuators Illuminated Pushbuttons C22 Description Unit Momentary Maintained 1 Indicator Lights C22 Selector Switch Actuators C22 Key-Operated Buttons C22 Emergency Stop/ Emergency Switching OFF Pushbuttons C22 General Standards 1 IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 Lifespan, mechanical Operations Operating frequency Operations/h x 106 5 1 — 1 0.1 0.
1.6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22, continued Push-button Actuators Illuminated Pushbuttons C22 Description Unit Momentary Maintained Indicator Lights C22 Selector Switch Actuators C22 Key-Operated Buttons C22 Emergency Stop/ Emergency Switching OFF Pushbuttons C22 Switching Capacity Rated operational current AC-15 24V Ie A 4 4 — 4 4 4 110V Ie A 2 2 — 2 2 2 230V Ie A 1.5 1.5 — 1.5 1.5 1.
1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in mm [in] 1 Illuminated Pushbuttons 1 Flat Extended C22(S)-DRL_/C22(S)-DL_ C22(S)-DRLH_/C22(S)-DLH_ 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] 6.0 [0.24] 4.0 [0.16] Ø29.7 [1.17] 10.4 [0.41] 9.6 [0.38] 6.0 [0.24] 4.0 [0.16] 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] M22 x 1.5 20.2 [0.80] Ø29.5 [1.16] Ø29.7 [1.17] 16.7 [0.66] 54.6 [2.15] 1 9.6 [0.38] 1 1 M22 x 1.5 20.2 [0.80] Ø29.5 [1.16] 1 1 60.9 [2.
1.6 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Approximate Dimensions in mm [in] Emergency Stop/Emergency Switching OFF Pushbuttons C22-PVT45P_ C22-PVT60P_ 1 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] 1 6.0 [0.24] 9.3 [0.37] Ø45.0 [1.77] 1 1 45.0 [1.77] Ø20.4 [0.80] 45.0 [1.77] Ø20.4 [0.80] M22 x 1.5 92.0 [3.62] C22-PVT45P-RS_ 1 9.3 [0.37] 6.0 [0.24] 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] 4.0 [0.16] Ø45.0 [1.17] 1 Ø29.5 [1.16] 48.0 [1.89] C22-PVT45P-MS_ 1 4.0 [0.
1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Approximate Dimensions in mm [in] 1 Selector Switch Actuators 1 Selector Switch Actuators/V Position C22(S)-W(R)K_ 1 C22(S)-W(R)KV_ 9.6 [0.38] 6.0 [0.24] 4.0 [0.16] 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] 30° 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] M22 x 1.5 6.0 [0.24] 4.0 [0.16] 9.6 [0.38] 1 M22 x 1.5 1 1 Ø29.7 [1.17] 20.2 [0.80] Ø29.5 [1.16] Ø29.7 [1.17] 20.2 [0.80] Ø29.5 [1.16] 1 1 27.8 [1.09] 27.8 [1.09] 72.0 [2.83] 1 72.0 [2.
1.7 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Contents Description 1 Page 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . .
1.7 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Product Identification 1 30.
1.7 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 1.
1.7 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.7 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.7 1 Type C Extended Button Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 1.7 Operating Buttons and Lens Only Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking 1 1 Black lettering on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear. White lettering on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray.
1.7 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 1 Operating Lens Only Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking 1 1 Black lettering on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear. White lettering on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Type K Lenses 1.
1.7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Contact Blocks Standard Contact Blocks—Molded, phenolic construction. Enclosed silver contacts with reliability “nibs” that improve the reliability of switching performance under dry circuit, corrosive atmosphere and fine dust conditions. For more extreme conditions, the logic level contact blocks described below are recommended. Logic Level Contact Blocks—Feature palladium contacts.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 1.7 Accessories 1 Accessories E30KR_ E30KT_ Description Color/Type Catalog Number Collar—Snap on mounting for assembly in the field. Permits color coding of operator heads. Size: 1-19/32 x 1-19/32 x 9/16 in.
1.7 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Options Markings and Legend Plates 1 1 1 1 Buttons or Lenses with NonStandard Horizontal Markings Markings not listed as Standard Markings below are considered non-standard. If more than one marking is required on a button or lens, order non-standard markings. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ordering Example Green Type B button to be marked with non-standard legend “ALL ELEVATORS DOWN.
1.7 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Buttons or Lenses with Non-Standard Vertical Markings Ordering Instructions ● Specify catalog number of blank button or lens of desired color, selected from listings on Pages V7-T1-169 to V7-T1-173. ● Specify size, legend desired, location and state “vertically marked” in order notes. Note: Specify either 1/8 or 3/16 in (3.2 or 4.8 mm) character height.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 1.
1.7 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 1 Technical Data and Specifications 1 Operator Specifications 1 Climate Conditions 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Specification Operating –20° to 150°F (–29° to 65°C) Terminals Light units Terminals are saddle clamp type for 2 stranded or solid wires up to 12 AWG (4.0 mm2) Torque—7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) Contact block Terminals are saddle clamp type for 2 stranded or solid wires up to 12 AWG (4.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 1.7 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Combination Pushbutton and Indicating Light Operators Pushbutton Operators 0.53 (13.5) 1.75 (44.5) 0.81 (20.6) 1.72 (43.7) 1.72 (43.7) Plunger 2 Circ. Extends to Cont. Blocks 0.25 (6.4) 1.13 (28.7) 1.47 (37.3) 0.63 (16) Std. Square Button 0.78 (19.8) Ext. Button 0.81 (20.6) 1.13 (28.7) 1.47 (37.3) Square Panel 0.88 0.88 0.06 (1.5) Min. 0.25 (6.4) Max.
1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Contents 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Description 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-183 V7-T1-183 V7-T1-184 V7-T1-186 V7-T1-187 V7-T1-188 V7-T1-192 V7-T1-193 V7-T1-194 V7-T1-196 V7-T1-199 V7-T1-202 V7-T1-203 V7-T1-207 V7-T1-208 V7-T1-211 V7-T1-214 V7-T1-215 V7-T1-216 V7-T1-219 V7-T1-220 V7-T1-225 V7-T1-230 V7-T1-239 V7-T1-241 V7-T1-244 Drawings Online 1 1 Page 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Product Overview 1 Reliability Nibs Grounding Nibs Eaton’s contact blocks feature enclosed silver contacts with pointed “reliability nibs” for reliable performance from logic level up to 600V. To ensure reliable switching, nibs bite through oxide which can form on silver contacts, eliminating the need for expensive logic level blocks for most applications.
1.8 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Product Selection Point-of-Purchase Packaging 1 1 Point-of-Purchase Packaged Pilot Device 10250T Point-of-Purchase Packaged Pilot Devices Product Description Catalog Number Emergency Stop Operators 1 1 1 1 Red non-illuminated push-pull 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP. 10250T5B62-1-POP Red mushroom pushbutton 1NO-1NC contact block.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1 Lockout Pushbutton Operators with Padlock Attachments UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 The following pushbutton and mushroom operators include an integral padlock attachment for applications requiring lockout/tagout of specific machine functions.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Key Pushbutton Operator UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 These devices incorporate an integral locking mechanism which enables locking units in various positions (Locked Down), locking units to 1 prevent operation (Locked Up) or setting unit to lock when the button is pressed (Push to Lock), requiring the key to be inserted to return to 1 normal operation.
1.8 1 1 30.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Plastic Glass 10250TC2_ Plastic Glass 1.
1.8 1 1 30.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 Two-Position Push-Pull Units 1 Operator Position 1 Pull Push Button Type/Color 2 Contact Type Mounting Location A B Catalog Number 2 1 Two-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull 10250T5B62-1X O X X O 40 mm/red 1 1NO 10250T5B62-1X 1 1NC 1 10250T5B63-1X O X X O 40 mm engraved EMERG.
1.8 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 10250T_ Three-Position Push-Pull Units Operator Position 1 1 Pull Intermediate 1 Maintained Push, Momentary Pull Push Button Type/Color 2 X X 1 O X O O Contact Type Mounting Location A B 40 mm/black 1NC 10250T9B60-3X 40 mm/red 1NC 10250T9B62-3X 40 mm engraved EMERG.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.
1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 Lens and Color Selection 1 Color 1 Standard 1 1 1 1 1 Side-Lighted Aluminum Incandescent Suffix Code LED Suffix Code Catalog Number Red C47 RD 10250TC47 Red (EMERG.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.
1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Potentiometers UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Vertical or Horizontal 1 Potentiometer One-Hole Mounting Potentiometer Ohms with Knob and Standard Dial Plate—Linear Type ±10% Catalog Number 1 2 Watt (60V Max.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Push-Pull Operators An illuminated push-pull pushbutton unit, arranged for one-hole mounting, can replace two pushbuttons and a pilot light or the nonilluminated form can replace two pushbuttons. These units are available in three basic types: ● ● Maintained—(Twoposition). Maintains in the pulled or pushed position until manually actuated to the opposite mode. Momentary—(Threeposition).
1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Application Guide To assist in the selection of contact blocks, the sketch to the right shows pictorially by symbols A and B locations of contact circuits after assembly of contact blocks and adapter to the operator. The table below shows the effect of the push and pull operations on either NO or NC contacts. (X = contact closed, O = contact open).
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.
1.8 Incandescent Suffix Code LED Suffix Code 1 Catalog Number Red C47 RD 10250TC47 Red (EMERG. STOP) C53 ED 10250TC53 Green C48 GD 10250TC48 Blue C49 LD 10250TC49 Amber C50 AD 10250TC50 White C51 WD 10250TC51 Clear C52 CD 10250TC52 Lens Color Standard 1 1 1 1 1 30.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Selector Switch Selection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cam and Contact Block Selection Selector switches in their varied forms (two-position, three-position and fourposition) are a big factor contributing to the great flexibility of control that a well rounded line of “pushbuttons” can achieve. Because of their flexibility, they tend to cause difficulty with product selection and application.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Step 3: Cam Selection. The cam you select determines the operation of all contact blocks mounted to the operator. It is selected on the basis that it provides the simplest circuitry for the desired “X-O” diagram. The selection tables show all the “X-O” combinations. For the purpose of this example, the applicable portion of those tables is shown on this page.
1.8 1 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Three-Position Switch—Cam and Contact Block Selection Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function (Jumpers must be installed where indicated) 1 Desired Circuit and Operator Position 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights No.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Key Removal Positions C L R Code Suffix Key Removal Position 1 Right only 1 2 Left only 3 Right and left 1 4 Center only 5 Right and center 6 Left and center 7 All positions 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Selector Switch Operators without Caps Operators can be ordered with caps assembled to them by adding the code number from the table on this page to the end of catalog number below.
1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Joysticks Two-Position Joystick Operators The device mounts in the standard 30.5 mm mounting hole. Allow sufficient panel space for lever movement. The maximum travel of the knob operator (full up to full down) is 2.2 in (24°) momentary, 2.5 in (30°) maintained, but ample space for lever operation must be allowed. These operators are field convertible from momentary to maintained operation or vice versa.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Four-Position Joystick Operators The joystick operated control unit is intended for AC application only. For other use, see Application Caution on preceding page. Four-Position Joystick Operator The panel area required for the four-position operator is equivalent to two standard pushbutton operators. 1 The latch holds the lever in the center position.
1.8 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Contact Block Operation Blank Legend Plates for Joystick Operators Contact blocks mount directly to the back of the operator. For reliable operation, the maximum number of contact blocks that should be installed behind each operator lever is two (four total).
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Roto-Push Units 1 Two-Position Momentary Complete assembled twoposition Roto-Push® Units are listed below. These operators have black flush buttons and are arranged for vertical mounting. Order legend plates separately.
1.8 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Roto-Push Operators Roto-Push Components A Roto-Push control unit combines the function of a pushbutton and a selector switch. The contacts are operated by the combined action of rotating the outer collar and pushing a button contained in the collar.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Accessories 1 Padlocks not included with padlocking attachments. For operators with built-in padlock attachment, see Page V7-T1-190. 1 1 1 Accessories Description Catalog Number 1 Padlock Attachments 10250TA2 10250TA26 Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock. Will not lock NO contact.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Accessories, continued 1 Description 1 Catalog Number Shrouds and Guards 10250TA6 Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator Prevents accidental operation. (Not for push-pull operators.) 10250TA6 10250TA12 Extended Retaining Nut Replaces standard nut and provides guard for flush head pushbutton operators.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Accessories, continued Description 1 Catalog Number 1 Hardware and Kits 10250TK3 10250TK5 56-9337 Thrust Washers— To meet Ford Motor Co. mounting specifications. 10250TK3 Contact Block Tape Seal— Seals plunger openings on last contact block. Order in multiples of 10 pieces. 10250TK5 Selector Switch Operator Gasket— Seals out dust from getting in-between the cam and contact block plungers.
1.8 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Accessories, continued 1 Description 1 Catalog Number Special Operators and Attachments 10250TA5 Wobble Stick Complete with retaining nut—fits standard button. 10250TA5 10250TA14 Lever Operator For use with two vertically mounted flush pushbuttons. 10250TA14 10250TA_ Maintained Contact Attachment Release Button Assembly 1 Mechanically interlocks with another pushbutton and contact block (not included). Provides mode indication.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.
1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Options Legend Plates 1 1 1 1 1 Legend Plates with Standard Markings The legend plates listed spacing less than 1.75 in, below are sized for all replace the S in the catalog standard commercial number with MS, or the M enclosures and Eaton’s cast with P (except push-pull). No enclosures. For vertical change in price. The smaller size legend plates, “MS” or “P” size, have limited space for legend.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 For Selector Switch and Roto-Push Operators—Standard Size Square Legend Plate Square 1 Catalog Number 1/2 Round Catalog Number Legend 10250TS38 10250TM38 AUTO OFF HAND HAND AUTO 10250TS39 10250TM39 HIGH LOW 10250TS40 10250TM40 JOG RUN 10250TS41 MAN. AUTO 10250TS67 OFF ON Legend Color of Field Color of Field Square 1 Catalog Number 1/2 Round Catalog Number Blank—see table on Page V7-T1-232.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1 Legend Plates with Non-Standard Markings When Ordering Specify Ordering Example: 1 ● 1 1 1 1 1 ● Catalog number of blank plate phase plus Suffix “STAMP.” Insert the following into Order Notes: legend, letter size and locations (letters A–W)—combine letters for definitive locations as shown. Catalog No.: 10250TS36STAMP Letter Size: 3/32 in (2.4 mm) Pos. A—POWER HOUSE Pos.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.
1.8 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Die Cast and Stainless Steel—Flush Mount, Covers Only Flush Mounting Covers Covers Only—Flush Mounting Number of Elements 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 In-Line Flat Cover 1 10250TF11 10250TF1 2 10250TF12 10250TF2 3 10250TF13 10250TF3 4 10250TF14 10250TF4 With Pullbox Without Pullbox 1 10250TS10 10250TS1 2 10250TS11 10250TS2 3 10250TS12 10250TS3 4 10250TS14 10250TS4 Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-247.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.
1.8 1 10250T1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Contact Blocks Standard 1 Symbol Circuit Description 1 Logic Level Pressure Terminal Catalog Number Spade Terminal 2 Catalog Number Pressure Terminal Catalog Number Spade Terminal 2 Catalog Number 1 Blank No Plunger 1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 10250T1CP Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds Circuit Description 1 Standard Pressure Terminal 2 Catalog Number Blank No Plunger 1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51P 10250T51EP Blank No Plunger 1NO Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53P 10250T53EP NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
1.8 1 10250T1C Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Amber Contact Blocks Standard 1 Symbol Circuit Description 1 Logic Level Pressure Terminal 2 Catalog Number Spade Terminal 3 Catalog Number Pressure Terminal 2 Catalog Number Spade Terminal 3 Catalog Number 1 Blank No Plunger 1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Replacement Parts 1 1 Replacement Lamps—For 10250T Illuminated Operators Mfg. Lamp Type Voltage Base Style Application Part Number 120MB 120V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T resistor indicating light 28-3044 #267 6.3V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T flasher 10250ED986-4 #755 6.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1 1 1 1 Flush Head Pushbutton Operator Two-Position Joystick Operator Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator Jumbo Mushroom Head Operator Mushroom Head Operator with Padlock Attachment Knob-Operated Selector Switch Operator 1 1 1 1 1 1 Four-Position Joystick Operator (without Latch) Illuminated Pushbutton Operator 1 10250T Style Operator Replacement Parts 1 Item No. 1 1 1 1 1 Description No. Req.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Technical Data and Specifications 1 Mechanical Ratings Description 1 Specification 1 Frequency of Operation All pushbuttons 6000 operations/hr. Key and lever selection switches 3000 operations/hr. Auto-latch devices 1200 operations/hr. 1 1 1 Life Pushbuttons 10 x 106 operations Contact blocks 10 x 106 operations PresTest units 10 x 106 operations Lever and key selector switches 0.
1.8 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Electrical Ratings Description Specification Insulation Ui = 660 Vac or Vdc Thermal Ith = 10A Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Rated conditional short circuit current 1 kA Fuse type GE power controls TIA 10, red spot type gG, 10A, 660 Vac, 460 Vdc, BS88-2, IEC 60269-2-1 UL rating A600, P600 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 AC load life duty cycle 1200 operations/hour 10A 110V pf 0.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Mounting Options 1 Panel Thickness ● Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm) ● Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate ● Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut ● Indicating light: 10250TA30 ● Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31 1 1 1 1 Mounting Matrix 1 Legend Plate Dimensions in Inches (mm) A B C D Small 1.63 (41.3) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.63 (41.3) Medium 1.75 (44.5) 2.
1.8 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Mechanically Interlocked Pushbutton Operators 1 Adjustable 1 1.62 (41.1) Min. 1 1 1 1 0.88 (22.4) for Each Additional Contact Block 1.07 (27.2) 0.89 (22.6) Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable in the Down Position 2.03 (51.6) 1.09 (27.7) 2.0 (50.8) Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable in the Up Position—Mushroom Head 2.5 (63.5) 1 1 0.94 (23.9) 0.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Key Operated Pushbutton Operator 1 Operator and Cam 1.53 (38.9) 1.5 (38.1) Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator Only with Button 0.24 (6) 1 1.38 (35.1) 1.38 (35.1) 0.86 (21.8) 1 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) 1 1 0.38 (9.7) Long Button Only 1 1 Special Rotor Latch 1 1.13 (28.7) 1.55 (39.3) Spring Return 2.37 (60.3) Auto-Latch 1 1.38 (35.1) 1.5 (38.1) 1.53 (38.9) 1 0.
1.8 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Surface Mounting Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures 4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for 1 – 4 Element Die Cast/ Stainless Steel Enclosure 7/32 Screw Size for Polyester 1 1 E B 1 1 D A 1 1 C Surface Element Arrangement Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E Conduit Entrance In-line 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (101.6) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 3.25 (82.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Flush Mounting 1 Die Case and Stainless Steel Covers Only 1 4 Mtg. Holes - 10-32 Screw Size for 1-11 Element Encl, 1/4-20 Screw Size for 12 Element and Larger 1 1 E 1 B 1 1 D C A Surface or Pendant 1 1 Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E 1 1 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (101.6) 0.25 (6.4) 2 3.50 (88.9) 3.63 (92.2) 1 2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 0.25 (6.4) 2 3.50 (88.
1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Flush and Long Pushbutton Half Shroud 1.81 (46) 1.09 (27.7) 1.06 (26.9) 0.38 (9.7) Long Button Only Push-Pull Switch 0.88 0.88 (22.4) (22.4) 0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4) Panel Thickness 1 1 1 1 1 1.38 (35.1) 1.78 (45.2) Half Shroud Is Same as Long Pushbutton with Lower Half of Guard Ring Cut Back Mushroom and Jumbo Head Pushbutton 1 0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 PresTest Indicating Light—Transformer Type PresTest Indicating Light—Resistor Type 1 1.88 (47.8) 1.78 (45.2) 1 1.38 (35.1) 1.78 (45.2) 2.19 (55.6) 1.94 (49.3) 1 1.38 (35.1) 1.56 (39.6) 1 1.88 (47.8) 1 1.56 (39.6) 1 Jumbo Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator with Padlock Attachment 2.31 (58.7) 2.38 (60.5) Plastic 1.38 (35.1) Glass 1.59 (40.4) 1.63 (41.4) 1.75 (44.5) 1.
1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Coin Operated Selector Switch Wobble Stick Catalog No. 10250TA5 1.44 (36.6) Coin Slot Knob 2.44 (62) 21° 1.38 (35.1) 1 21° 1 1 1 1 Lever A 1.22 (31) Operator Dim. A Knob 1.38 (35.1) Lever 1.50 (38.1) Coin slot 1.38 (35.1) Lever Operator—For Use with Two Vertically Mounted Flush Pushbuttons Catalog No. 10250TA14 2.19 (55.6) 1 1 Key Operated Selector Switch 1.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Padlock Attachment—For Knob Selector Switch Catalog No. 10250TA11 1 Maintained Contact Attachment Catalog No. 10250TA17 Typical 1 0.97 (24.6) 1 1.63 (41.4) 1 1.63 (41.4) Min. 0.44 (11.2) 1 2.31 (58.7) Max. 1 Padlock Attachment—For Flush Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA2 0.75 (19.1) 0.84 (21.3) 0.94 (23.9) 1 1.63 (41.4) 0.38 (9.
1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Protecting Shroud for Mushroom Head Button Catalog No. 10250TA6 1.53 (38.9) 1.38 (35.1) A Min. A Min. 1.22 (31) Terminals at Side Horizontal Rows Protecting Shroud for Illuminated Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA15 1.75 (44.5) 1 Lever for Roto-Push Operator Catalog No. 10250TA13 Legend Plate Vertical Rows A Min. B Min. 1 or 2 Circuit Contact Blocks 0.44 (11.2) 1.
1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Multiple Button Guard Chain Hook Bracket 2.16 (54.9) 1.88 (47.8) 1 1 D A 0.75 (19.1) 4.0 (101.6) 3 5.88 (149.4) 4 7.88 (200.2) 7 13.38 (339.9) C 1 Enclosure Size (No. of Elements) Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E 1 2, 3 and 4 3.75 (95.3) 1.94 (49.3) 0.13 (3.3) 2.69 (68.3) 1.38 (35.1) 1 6 and 7 4.0 (101.6) 2.19 (55.6) 0.13 (3.3) 2.88 (73.2) 1.
1.9 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Description 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Page 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-255 Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-256 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-257 Ordering Complete Devices . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Product Overview Ultraviolet Light Reliability Nibs E34 cathodic coating is not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists—use NEMA 4X 10250T operators. Eaton’s contact blocks feature enclosed silver contacts with pointed “reliability nibs” for reliable performance from logic level up to 600V.
1.9 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Product Identification 30.
1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Ordering Complete Devices Complete E34 pushbuttons, indicating lights and/or selector switch operators including contact block(s) and legend plate can be ordered using a single composite catalog number.
1.9 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Product Selection Non-Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 Flush Button 1 Pushbutton Units Contact Type Button Color 1NO Black Red Green Red—Engraved EMERG.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.
1.9 1 1 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Plastic Glass E34V_ Plastic Glass 1.
1.9 1 1 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Push-Pull Units UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● ● Two- and three-position Non-illuminated 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Two-Position Push-Pull Unit Two-Position Push-Pull Units, Non-Illuminated Operator Position 1 Pull Push 1 Mounting Location Button Type/Color 2 Contact Type 40 mm/red 1NO E34GDBC2-1X 40 mm engraved EMERG.
1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.9 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.
1.9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ● Maintained—(Twoposition). Maintains in the pulled or pushed position until manually actuated to the opposite mode. Momentary—(Threeposition). Spring returns to an intermediate position when pulled or pushed and released. 1 1 ● An illuminated push-pull pushbutton unit, arranged for one-hole mounting, can replace two pushbuttons and a pilot light or the nonilluminated form can replace two pushbuttons. These units are available in three basic types: ● 1 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.
1.9 Incandescent Suffix Code Catalog Number Black C1 E34C1 Red C2 E34C2 Red (EMERG. STOP) C2N8 E34C2N8 Green C3 E34C3 Blue C6 E34C6 Red 1 J2 E34J2 Red (EMERG. STOP) J2N8 E34J2N8 Color Standard 1 1 1 1 30.
1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.9 1 1 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Selector Switch Units UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● ● Two-, three- and four-position—maintained Non-illuminated and illuminated 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Two-Position Maint.
1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Selector Switch Selection 1 1 1 1 Cam and Contact Block Selection Selector switches in their varied forms (two-position, three-position and fourposition) are a big factor contributing to the great flexibility of control that a well rounded line of “pushbuttons” can achieve. Because of their flexibility, they tend to cause difficulty with product selection and application.
1.9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Step 3: Cam Selection. The cam you select determines the operation of all contact blocks mounted to the operator. It is selected on the basis that it provides the simplest circuitry for the desired “X-O” diagram. The selection tables show all the “X-O” combinations. For the purpose of this example, the applicable portion of those tables is shown on this page.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Three-Position Switch—Cam and Contact Block Selection 1 Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function (Jumpers must be installed where indicated) Desired Circuit and Operator Position No.
1.9 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Key Removal Positions 1 Dissimilar Locks and Keys Listed operators have identical locks and keys (Key Code H661), Catalog Number 10250ED824. For dissimilar lock and key combinations, see Page V7-T1-212. C L R Code Suffix Key Removal Position 1 Right only 2 Left only 3 Right and left 4 Center only 6 Left and center 7 All positions 1.
1.9 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Accessories 1 Accessories E34TA2 Description Catalog Number Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators. Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock. Will not lock NO contact. E34TA2 1 1 1 1 10250TA_ Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with flush pushbutton operators.
1.9 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Accessories, continued 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Description Catalog Number E34TK3 Thrust Washer—To meet Ford Motor Company mounting specifications. E34TK3 10250TA7_ Contact Block Terminal Jumps—Available in multiples of 100 only.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Options 1 Legend Plates 1 1 Field Color Legend plates can be supplied printed on black, red, silver or white field. To order legend printed on a color other than indicated—add Standard suffix code to the end of the catalog number as follows: 1 Example: E34SP26R— Standard plate with red field marked OPEN. “R” for Red field; “W” for White field; or “S” for Silver field.
1.9 1 Standard Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 For Selector Switch Operators Legend 1 Color of Field Standard Catalog Number Jumbo Catalog Number Two-Position—3/16 in High Lettering 1 Standard Catalog Number Jumbo Catalog Number Three-Position—3/16 in High Lettering E34LP38 AUTO OFF HAND E34SP49 E34LP49 HAND AUTO E34SP39 E34LP39 FOR. OFF REV. E34SP50 E34LP50 HIGH LOW E34SP40 E34LP40 FOR. SAFE REV.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.
1.9 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Die Cast and Stainless Steel—Flush Mount, Covers Only 1 Flush Mounting Covers Covers Only—Flush Mounting Number of Elements 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 In-Line Flat Cover 1 E34F11 E34F1 2 E34F12 E34F2 3 E34F13 E34F3 4 E34F14 E34F4 With Pullbox Without Pullbox 1 10250TS10 10250TS1 2 10250TS11 10250TS2 3 10250TS12 10250TS3 4 10250TS14 10250TS4 Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-293.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.
1.9 1 10250T1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Contact Blocks Standard 1 Symbol Circuit Description 1 Logic Level Pressure Terminal Catalog Number Spade Terminal 2 Catalog Number Pressure Terminal Catalog Number Spade Terminal 2 Catalog Number 1 Blank No Plunger 1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted.
1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 10250T1CP Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds Circuit Description 1 Standard Pressure Terminal 2 Catalog Number Blank No Plunger 1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51P 10250T51EP Blank No Plunger 1NO Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53P 10250T53EP NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1 1 1 1 1 1 Flush Head Pushbutton Operator Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator Jumbo Mushroom Head Operator Potentiometers Illuminated Pushbutton Operator Transformer Type Indicating Light Knob-Operated Selector Switch Operator Full Voltage, Resistor and Transformer Type Illuminated Selector Switch 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E34 Style Operator Replacement Parts Item No. Description No. Req.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Technical Data and Specifications 1 Mechanical Ratings Description 1 Specification 1 Frequency of Operation All pushbuttons 6000 operations/hr. Key and lever selector switches 3000 operations/hr. Auto-latch devices 1200 operations/hr. 1 1 1 Life Pushbuttons 10 x 106 operations Contact blocks 10 x 106 operations PresTest units 10 x 106 operations Lever and key selector switches 0.
1.9 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Electrical Ratings Description Specification Insulation Ui = 660 Vac or Vdc Thermal Ith = 10A Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Rated conditional short circuit current 1 kA Fuse type GE power controls TIA 10, red spot type gG, 10A, 660 Vac, 460 Vdc, BS88-2, IEC 60269-2-1 UL rating A600, P600 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 AC load life duty cycle 1200 operations/hour 10A 110V pf 0.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Mounting Options 1 Panel Thickness ● Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm) ● Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate ● Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut ● Indicating light: 10250TA30 ● Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31 1 1 1 1 Mounting Matrix 1 Legend Plate Dimensions in Inches (mm) A B C D Small 1.63 (41.3) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.63 (41.3) Medium 1.75 (44.
1.9 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Potentiometer Legend Plates Large Dial Plate 1.88 (47.8) 1 1.09 1.0 (27.7) (25.4) Std. Dial Plate 1 1.31 (33.3) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) 0.75 (19.1) 1 1 1 1 2.19 (55.6) 1.77 (45) 0.94 (23.9) 1 1 2.19 (55.6) 1.77 (45) Jumbo Standard Surface Mounting Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures 4 Mtg.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Flush Mounting 1 Die Case and Stainless Steel Covers Only 1 4 Mtg. Holes - 10-32 Screw Size for 1-11 Element Encl, 1/4-20 Screw Size for 12 Element and Larger 1 1 E 1 B 1 1 D C A Surface or Pendant 1 1 Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E 1 1 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (101.6) 0.25 (6.4) 1 3.50 (88.9) 3.63 (92.2) 1 2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 0.25 (6.4) 1 3.
1.9 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators 0.84 (21.3) 0.75 (19.1) 0.94 (23.9) 1.63 (41.4) 1 1 Flexible Weather Resistant Boot 1 1.47 (37.3) 1.59 (40.4) 1 Transparent Boot 1 1.92 (48.8) 1.31 (33.3) 1.14 (29) 1.06 (26.9) 1.53 (38.9) 0.88 (22.4) Contact Blk. Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator Each Addl. Contact Blk. 1.78 (45.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1.63 (41.4) 1.09 (27.7) 0.88 (22.4) 1.50 (38.1) 1.09 (27.7) 1.78 (45.2) 1 1.13 (28.7) Jumbo Mushroom Pushbutton Contact Blk. 2.50 (63.5) 1 1.58 (40.1) Knob 1 1 Contact Block 1.75 (44.5) 1.09 (27.7) 1 Selector Switch Each Additional Contact Block Each Addl. Contact Blk. 0.88 (22.4) 1 1.38 (35.1) 1.09 (27.7) 1.78 (45.2) 1 0.69 (17.
1.10 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Contents 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Description 1 Page 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Momentary Pushbutton Units, Non-Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating Light Units . . .
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.10 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.10 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Product Selection Momentary Pushbutton Units, Non-Illuminated 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Flush, extended or 40 mm mushroom head operators 1 ● 1 HT800 Pushbuttons HT800 Pushbuttons—Point-of-Purchase Units Description Catalog Number 1 Two-position maintained selector switch 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: OFF ON, MAN.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Flush Head Operator Extended Head Operator Momentary Contact Pushbutton Units, Non-Illuminated Contact Type Button Color Flush Head Catalog Number Extended Head Catalog Number Mushroom Head (40 mm) Catalog Number No contact Black HT8AAH HT8ABH HT8AEH Red HT8AAR HT8ABR HT8AER Green HT8AAG HT8ABG HT8AEG Black HT8AAHA HT8ABHA HT8AEHA Red HT8AARA HT8ABRA HT8AERA 1NO 1NC 40 mm Mushroom Head Operator 1.
1.10 1 1 1 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.
1.10 1 1 1 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.
1.10 1 1 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.
1.10 1 1 30.
1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.10 1 1 30.
1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.10 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.
1.10 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.10 Legend Plates with Non-Standard Markings When Ordering Specify ● ● 1 Ordering Example: Catalog number of blank plate. Insert the following into Order Notes: legend, letter size and locations. See information below. Legend Characters Available Catalog no.: HT85P76STAMP Letter size: 3/32 in (2.4 mm) Pos. A—POWER HOUSE Pos. B—START PUMP 1 1 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO PQRSTUVWXYZ/-.
1.10 1 1 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Contact Blocks NO Contact Block 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights NC Contact Block 1 1 Contact Blocks 12 Description/Function Contact Type Without Guard Catalog Number Fingerproof Catalog Number Standard normally open contact NO HT8A HT8AP Standard normally closed contact NC HT8B HT8BP Normally open early make contact will make circuit before standard NO contact. DC ratings do not apply.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.
1.10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.10 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Momentary Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated Back, side and bottom views of pushbutton operator with attached contact blocks. Stacking Screw Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. 1 4.60 (116.8) Panel 3.70 (94.0) 2.90 (73.7) 2.00 (50.8) 1 0.90 (22.9) Extended 1 1 1.40 (35.6) #6-32 Posi-drive Saddle Clamp Type 1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only 1 1 0.
1.10 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Mushroom Head Pushbuttons and Round Head MRH Push-Pull Operators Back, side and bottom views of mushroom head operator with attached contact blocks. Stacking Screw Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. 4.60 (116.8) Panel 3.70 (94.0) 2.90 (73.7) 2.00 (50.8) 1 1.50 (38.1) 1 1.40 (35.6) 1 1 1 1 1 #6-32 Posi-drive 1.00 Saddle Clamp Type (25.4) 1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 2.00 (50.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.10 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Indicating Lights Back, side and bottom views of indicating light operator with attached contact blocks. 1 Panel #6-32 Posi-drive Saddle Clamp Type 1x22 AWG to 2 x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 7 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only 1 1 1 1.30 (33.0) 1 1 Stacking Screw Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. 1 1.68 (42.7) Back View Light Unit Assembly Side View 1.67 (42.4) 1 1 1.26 (32.
1.10 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Mounting Matrix and Minimum Panel Spacing Requirements 2.19 (55.6) 2.50 (63.5) 0.18 (4.6) 1.77 (45) 0.68 (17.3) 1 1 2.50 (63.5) 1 1 Legend Plates 2.19 (55.6) 1.77 (45) Optional Notch Locations Standard Jumbo 1 1 1.20 (30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.11 Contents Description Page 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations— 10250T/E34 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Momentary Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . .
1.11 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Product Overview Operator 10250T Grounding Nibs The 30.5 mm 10250T pushbutton line features a zinc die cast construction with chrome-plated housing and mounting nut. 10250T line operators have “grounding nibs”—four metal points on the operator casting designed to bite through most paints and other coatings on metal panels to enhance the grounding connection when the operator is securely tightened.
1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Product Identification 1 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1.11 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.11 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.
1.11 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.11 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.
1.11 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.
1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.11 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.
1.11 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.
1.11 1 1 1 1 1 An illuminated push-pull pushbutton unit, arranged for one-hole mounting, can replace two pushbuttons and a pilot light or the nonilluminated form can replace two pushbuttons. These units are available in three basic types: ● 1 1 1 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Push-Pull Operators 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights ● Maintained—(Twoposition). Maintains in the pulled or pushed position until manually actuated to the opposite mode.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.
1.11 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number Red 10250TC47 E34M2 Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250TC53 E34M2N8 Green 10250TC48 E34M3 Blue 10250TC49 E34M6 Amber 10250TC50 E34M9 White 10250TC51 E34M5 Clear 10250TC52 E34M0 Color Standard 1 1 1 1 1 30.
1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.11 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.
1.11 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Selector Switch Selection 1 1 1 1 10250T E34 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cam and Contact Block Selection Selector switches in their varied forms (two-position, three-position, and fourposition) are a big factor contributing to the great flexibility of control that a well rounded line of “pushbuttons” can achieve. Because of their flexibility, they tend to cause difficulty with product selection and application.
1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Step 3: Cam Selection. The cam you select determines the operation of all contact blocks mounted to the operator. It is selected on the basis that it provides the simplest circuitry for the desired “X-O” diagram. The selection tables show all the “X-O” combinations. For the purpose of this example, the applicable portion of those tables is shown on this page.
1.11 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.11 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Key Removal Positions C L 1.
1.11 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Illuminated Selector Switch Operators Two-Position Maint.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.
1.11 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Options Contact Blocks and Mounting Adapters 1 NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D 1 Contact Block 1 Contact Block Description Catalog Number Class I Division 2 factory sealed contact block with 1NO-1NC 10250T1H 1 Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-359.
1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Mounting and Assembly 1 Mounting Matrix Panel Thickness ● Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm) ● Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate ● Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut ● Indicating light: 10250TA30/E34TA30 ● Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31/E34TA31 1 Legend Plate Dimensions in Inches (mm) A B C D Small 2.87 (72.6) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.87 (72.
1.11 1 1 30.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.11 Technical Data and Specifications 1 Mechanical Ratings Description 1 Specification 1 Frequency of Operation All pushbuttons 6000 operations/hr. Key and lever selector switches 3000 operations/hr. 1 Pushbuttons 10 x 106 operations 1 Contact block 10 x 106 operations Key and lever selector switches 0.
1.11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Electrical Ratings—Contact Block Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designations A600 and Q300 A600 (AC) Q300 (DC) Description 120V 240V 480V 600V Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amps) 60 30 15 12 0.55 0.27 Normal load break (amps) 6 3 1.5 1.2 0.55 0.27 Thermal current (amps) 10 10 10 10 2.5 2.
1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Surface Mounting 1 Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures 1 4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for 1 – 4 Element Die Cast/ Stainless Steel Enclosure 7/32 Screw Size for Polyester 1 1 1 E 1 B 1 D A 1 C Surface 1 Element Arrangement Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E Conduit Entrance In-line 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (101.6) 3.00 (76.
1.11 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Ratings Summary of Classifications Summary of NEC Article 500 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The NEC Article 500 explains in great detail the requirements for the installation of wiring and electrical equipment in hazardous locations.
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.
Stacklights SL Series Stacklights 2.1 SL Series Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 2 Stacklights SL Series Contents Stacklights—SL Series Description 2 Page SL Series Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Identification—SL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection—SL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Identification—SL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection—SL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . .
Stacklights SL Series 2.
2.1 2 2 Stacklights SL Series Component Identification—SL7 Component Identification 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Light Modes 2 Continuous Incandescent Flashing Strobe Multi-Strobe — — — 2 LED 2 V7-T2-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.
Stacklights SL Series 2.
2.
Stacklights SL Series 2.
2.
2.1 Stacklights SL Series SL7 Acoustic Modules SL7-AP_ 2 Continuous Tone or Pulsed Tone, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 1 Adjustable with internal DIP switches. Sound pressure 100 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer. f = 2800 Hz.
2.
Stacklights SL Series 2.
2.1 2 2 Stacklights SL Series Component Identification—SL4 Component Identification 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Light Modes 2 Continuous Incandescent Flashing Strobe Multi-Strobe — — — 2 LED 2 V7-T2-12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.
Stacklights SL Series 2.
2.
Stacklights SL Series 2.
2.1 2 2 Stacklights SL Series Light Module with LED, continued SL4-FL24-_-M Multi-Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) 2 Color Function Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 SL4-FL24-B-M LED for Effective Signaling Effect With Various Strobe Sequences, 1–2.
Stacklights SL Series 2.
2.
Stacklights SL Series 2.1 Accessories 2 SL7 and SL4 Series 2 Mounting Brackets 2 Mounting Brackets for Vertical Mounting, Plastic SL7/4-FW Standard Pack 1 2 Catalog Number For Use With … SL4-PIB… SL7-CB... 2 SL7/4-FW 2 2 M20 Cable Gland for Vertical Mounting, Metal (Includes Mounting Bracket) SL7/4-FW-T Standard Pack 1 2 Catalog Number For Use With … SL4-PIB-T… SL7-CB-T...
2.1 Stacklights SL Series 2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 SL7 Series 2 2 SL7 General Specifications Description Specification Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Lens color Blue, green, red, clear, yellow, amber 2 Number of signal elements Max. 5 with standard base Max.
Stacklights SL Series 2.1 SL7 Light Module Specifications SL7-L-…-… SL7-BL-…-… SL7-FL-…-… SL7-L24-…-HP SL7-FL24-…-HP SL7-FL24-…-HPM SL7-L-… 2 Type of light Continuous light Flashing light Strobe light Continuous light Strobe light Multi-strobe light Continuous light 2 Light elements LED LED LED High-performance LED High-performance LED High-performance LED Incandescent bulb (max. 7W) 2 2 Unit Mounting — — — — — — Ba15d Flashing/strobe frequency — 2 Hz 1.4 Hz — 1.
2.1 2 Stacklights SL Series SL7 Acoustic Module Specifications Unit SL7-AP… SL7-AP…-E SL7-AP…-M 2 Type of tone Continuous or pulsed tone Continuous or pulsed tone Continuous or pulsed tone Eight types of sound 2 Types of sound Two versions, table of sound types Two versions, table of sound types Eight versions, table of sound types 2 Sound setting 2 2 Internal; single-pole DIP Can be externally actuated Internal; three-pole DIP Max.: 100 Min.: 88 Max.: 100 Min.: 88 Max.: 100 Min.
Stacklights SL Series 2.1 SL4 Series 2 SL4 General Specifications Description 2 Specification Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Lens color Blue, green, red, clear, yellow, orange Number of signal elements Max. 5 with standard base Max.
2.1 2 2 Stacklights SL Series SL4 Light Module Specifications Unit SL4-L…-… SL4-BL…-… Type of light Continuous light Flashing light Light elements LED LED SL4-FL…-… SL4-FL24-…-M SL4-L… Strobe light Multi-strobe light Continuous light LED LED Incandescent bulb (max. 4W) Ba15d 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Mounting — — — — Flashing/strobe frequency — 2 Hz 1.4 Hz 1–2.6 Hz — Transmission angle 360° 360° 360° 360° 360° A < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 24 Vac/Vdc A 0.
Stacklights SL Series 2.1 Dimensions 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 SL7 Series Complete Devices SL7-100-L-RG-24LED 2 Light Modules SL7-100-L-RYG-24LED SL7-(B)(F)L… 2 2 2.40 (61.0) 2 2 2 Ø2.87 (Ø73.0) 11.61 (295.0) 14.02 (356.0) 2 Acoustic Modules 2 SL7-AP… 2 2 2.80 (71.0) 2 2 Ø2.88 (Ø73.2) Ø2.84 (Ø72.0) 2 2 2 Ø2.84 (Ø72.0) 2 2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) 2 2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) 2 Ø2.13 (Ø54.
2.1 2 2 Stacklights SL Series Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Basic Modules SL7-CB-T… SL7-CB-… SL7-CB-D 2 2 2 2 A 4.68 (119.0) A 2 1.22 (31.0) 2 2 2 Ø0.23 (Ø5.8) Ø2.83 (Ø72.0) 3.23 (82.0) M20 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number A SL7-CB-T-100 7.48 (190.0) SL7-CB-T-250 13.38 (340.0) SL7-CB-T-400 19.29 (490.0) 3.78 (96.0) 3.31 (84.0) Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Catalog Number A SL7-CB-100 6.73 (171.0) SL7-CB-250 12.64 (321.0) SL7-CB-400 18.54 (471.0) SL7-CB-EMH 2 3.25 (82.
Stacklights SL Series 2.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) SL7-CB-FW 2 SL7-CB-IMS 2 2 2 3.23 (82.0) 2 4.21 (107.0) 2 Ø0.24 (Ø6.0) M5 2.05 (52.0) 2.76 (70.0) 2 0.79 (20.0) 2 2.87 (73.0) 3.54 (90.0) 2 SL7-SWD 1 SL7-FMS-… 2 2 3.31 (84.0) 2 2 A 7.56 (192.0) SL7-CB-IMH 2 2 2 3.23 (82.0) 2 Ø3.15 (Ø80.0) Ø3.15 (Ø80.0) 2 2 2.87 (72.0) 2 2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Ø0.23 (Ø5.8) Ø2.05 (Ø52.0) Catalog Number A SL7-FMS-100 7.55 (192.
2.1 2 2 2 Stacklights SL Series Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) SL4 Series Complete Devices Light Modules SL4-100-L-RG-24LED SL4-100-L-RYG-24LED SL4-(B)(F)L… 2 2 2.44 (62.0) 2 2 1.69 (43.0) 2 10.28 (261.0) 12.72 (323.0) 2 Acoustic Modules SL4-AP… 2 2 2.80 (71.0) 2 2 2 Ø2.84 (Ø72.0) 1.73 (44.0) 2 Ø2.84 (Ø72.0) 2 2 2 2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) 2 Ø2.13 (Ø54.
Stacklights SL Series 2.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Basic Modules SL4-PIB-T… SL4-PIB-… 2 SL4-PIB-D 2 2 2 A 3.82 (97.0) A 2 1.38 (35.0) 2 2 Ø0.23 (Ø5.9) Ø2.83 (Ø72.0) 2 1.77 (45.0) M20 2 Catalog Number A SL4-PIB-T-100 5.90 (150.0) SL4-PIB-T-250 11.81 (300.0) SL4-PIB-T-400 17.72 (450.0) 2 2.21 (56.0) 2 2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) 2.44 (62.0) Catalog Number A SL4-PIB-100 3.53 (136.0) SL4-PIB-250 11.26 (286.0) SL4-PIB-400 17.16 (436.
2.1 2 Stacklights SL Series Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) SL4-PIB-FW SL4-PIB-IMS 2 2 2 2.24 (57.0) 3.15 (80.0) 2 Ø0.23 (Ø5.8) 2 M5 0.83 (21.0) 0.87 (22.0) 2 1.77 (45.0) 2 1.69 (43.0) SL4-SWD 1 SL4-FMS-… 2 2.21 (56.0) 2 2 2 2 2.56 (65.0) A 6.18 (157.0) SL4-PIB-IMH 2 2 2.24 (57.0) 2 2 Ø3.15 (Ø80.0) Ø3.15 (Ø80.0) 1.34 (43.0) 2 2 2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) 2 Ø0.23 (Ø5.8) Ø0.87 (Ø22.0) 2 2 2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Catalog Number A SL4-FMS-100 6.18 (157.
Stacklights SL Series 2.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Mounting Brackets Incandescent Bulbs SL7/4-FW SL7-L12 and SL4-L12 2 2 Ø0.25 (Ø6.4) 1.38 (35.0) 1.81 (46.0) 1.97 (50.0) 2.83 (72.0) 2 Ø0.51 (Ø13.0) 2 Ø0.60 (Ø15.3) 2 3.58 (91.0) 0.67 (17.0) 2 2 Ø0.64 (Ø16.2) 2 2 Tool for Replacing Incandescent Bulb SL7/4-BET Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) 2 2 Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) 2.97 (75.5) SL7/4-FW-T 2 0.94 (24.0) 2.56 (65.0) 2.76 (70.0) 2 2.13 (54.0) Ø0.47 (Ø12.0) Ø0.79 (Ø20.0) 2 2 2 1.73 (44.
2.2 2 Stacklights E26 Series Contents Stacklights—E26 Series Description 2 Page E26 Series Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Stacklights E26 Series Product Identification 2 Complete Stacklight Modules ● Level 3 Level 2 Standard Stacklight Base For use with incandescent or standard LEDs for steady, non-flashing illumination or with flashing LEDs for flashing illumination. Bases include terminal block for wiring, stacklight cover and gasket. See Page V7-T2-38. Flashing Stacklight Base Allows configuration of each light in the stack for either steady or 60 times per minute flashing illumination.
2.
2.
2.2 2 2 Light modules include lens diffusers which provide even illumination and eliminate hot spots. 2 Light/LED Module 2 Without bulb or LED 2 Xenon Strobe Module 2 2 12 Vac/Vdc 2 2 2 24 Vac/Vdc 2 2 2 48 Vac/Vdc 2 2 2 2 120 Vac 2 2 2 2 240 Vac 2 2 2 2 ● Xenon strobes emit a bright attention-getting white flashing light. Flash rate = 60/min. ● Xenon strobe modules occupy two positions in the stacklight assembly.
Stacklights E26 Series 2.
2.
Stacklights E26 Series 2.2 Alarm Units and Extension Tubes Components 2 Audible Alarm Units-NEMA Type 1 (IP20) E26B_ Description 1 2 Voltage Catalog Number 12 Vac/Vdc E26BQV1 12.6 mA 24 Vac/Vdc E26BQV2 9.4 mA 48 Vac/Vdc E26BQV3 11.5 mA 120 Vac/Vdc E26BQV4 5.1 mA 240 Vac/Vdc E26BQV5 2 4.5 mA 12 Vac/Vdc E26BNV1 2 12.6 mA 24 Vac/Vdc E26BNV2 9.4 mA 48 Vac/Vdc E26BNV3 11.5 mA 120 Vac/Vdc E26BNV4 5.1 mA 240 Vac/Vdc E26BNV5 12 Vac/Vdc E26BPV1 12.
2.
Stacklights E26 Series 2.
2.2 2 Stacklights E26 Series Ratings 2 Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory conditions and should be used for comparison only. Actual life may be shorter due to various application conditions.
Stacklights E26 Series 2.2 Mounting Instructions Stacklight bases may be mounted without the use of an extension tube or mounting base. If additional height is required, choose Base Mounting Customer Supplied 0.8–30 in (20–760 mm) extension tubes that fit between the mounting base and stacklight base. The extension tubes are threaded with 3/4 in NPT threads, allowing for direct connection to conduit fittings or threaded holes without the use of a mounting base.
2.2 2 Stacklights E26 Series Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 2 Standard and Flashing Bases 1 Assembled Extension Tubes 2 2 1.75 (44) 2 2 2 2 2 2.32 (59) A Alarm Units 2.56 (65) 2 0.59 (15) 2 1.69 (42.9) 2 Tube Extension Height A 0.79 (20) 1.77 (45) 6.30 (160) 7.28 (185) 14.17 (360) 15.16 (385) 29.92 (760) 30.91 (785) Right Angle Extension Tubes 2 2 2.00 (50.8) 2 2 2.50 (63.
Stacklights E26 Series 2.2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 One-Light Unit Stacklight Standard 2 With Alarm With Xenon Flasher 2 2.56 (65) 2.56 (65) 2.56 (65) 0.59 (15) 0.59 (15) 2.72 (69) 2.24 (57) 2 2.72 (69) Light Unit 2.72 (69) 1.73 (44) 2 Alarm Xenon Light Unit (2 High) Light Unit 2 2 2.72 (69) Base 1.73 (44) 2 Base 1.73 (44) Base 2 2 Two-Light Unit Stacklight Standard 2 With Alarm 2.56 (65) 2.56 (65) Light Unit 2.
2.2 2 2 Stacklights E26 Series Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Three-Light Unit Stacklight Standard 2 2.56 (65) 2 0.59 (15) 2 2.72 (69) 2 2.56 (65) 2.24 (57) Light Unit 2.56 (65) 2.72 (69) Light Unit 2.72 (69) Light Unit 1.73 (44) Base Alarm 2.72 (69) Light Unit Xenon Light Unit (2 High) 2.72 (69) 2.72 (69) 2 2 With Xenon Flasher 0.59 (15) 2.72 (69) 2 2 With Alarm 2.72 (69) 1.73 (44) 2 Light Unit 2.72 (69) Light Unit 2.72 (69) Light Unit 1.
Control Relays and Timers easyRelay Programmable Relays 3.1 Relay Products Control Relays and Timers Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 V7-T3-2 3 XR Series Terminal Block Relays Standard, OptoCoupler and High Current Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 3 V7-T3-3 3 Programmable Relays easy500, easy700, easy800, easy802/806 Relays and MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 3 Control Relays and Timers Relay Product Overview Contents Relay Products Description 3 Page Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose Plug-In Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose Type AA Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid-State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Tool Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing Relays . . . . .
Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays 3.2 Contents Terminal Block Relays Description Page Terminal Block Relays Standard Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . High Current Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 3 Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays Contents Standard Terminal Block Relay Description 3 Page Standard Terminal Block Relays Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . High Current Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays 3.
3.2 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays Technical Data and Specifications Standard 1PDT Screw Connection Terminal Block Relays Catalog Number XRU1D12 XRU1D24 XRU1D24U Replacement Relay XRR1D12 XRR1D24 XRR1D24 XRU1D120U XRR1D120U Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc 3 Connection Data Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 3 Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.
Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays 3.2 Standard 1PDT Screw Connection Terminal Block Relays with Gold Contacts Catalog Number 3 XRU1D24UG XRU1D120UG Replacement Relay XRR1D24G XRR1D120UG Input voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.
3.2 3 Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays Standard 1PDT Spring Cage Terminal Block Relays Catalog Number XRP1D12 XRP1D24 XRP1D24U XRP1D120U 3 Replacement Relay XRR1D12 XRR1D24 XRR1D24 XRR1D120U Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc 3 Connection Data Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.
3.2 Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays Standard DPDT Screw Connection Terminal Block Relays Catalog Number XRU2D12 XRU2D24 XRU2D24U XRU2D120U 3 Replacement Relay XRR2D12 XRR2D24 XRR2D24 XRR2D120U Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.
3.2 3 3 3 1.4 DPDT Relay Modules Operating Range Voltage for 12 Vdc 1.4 A 1.2 1.2 U 1.1 UN 1.0 U 1.1 UN 1.0 UN = 12 Vdc 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8 B 0.7 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 TN [°C] 3 Operating Range Voltage for 120 Vac/110 Vdc 3 1.4 Operating Range Voltage for 120 Vac/110 Vdc 1.4 A 1.2 1.2 3 U 1.1 UN 1.0 U 1.1 UN 1.0 3 0.9 UN = 110 Vdc/120 Vac B Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vdc Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vdc 1.4 1.4 A 1.3 1.2 1.2 U 1.1 UN 1.0 3 UN = 24 Vdc 0.9 0.
3.2 Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays Electrical Schematics 1PDT Terminal Block Relays 3 DPDT Terminal Block Relays 3 3 21 24 A2 3 3 11 22 A2 14 A1 3 11 3 3 A1 12 14 3 3 12 3 Dimensions 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Standard 1PDT Terminal Block Relays 3 Standard DPDT Terminal Block Relays 3 3 3 3 3 3.70 (94.0) 3.70 (94.0) 3 3 3 3 3.15 (80.0) 3.15 (80.0) 3 0.24 (6.2) 3 0.55 (14.
3.2 3 Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays Contents OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relay Description 3 Page Standard Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Current Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . .
Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays 3.
3.2 3 3 3 Derating Curve OptoCoupler Dimensions Pluggable Power OptoCoupler (Solid-State) Terminal Block Relays 3 3 3 3 Terminal Block Relays Load Current (A) 3 Control Relays and Timers Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 2 1 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Ambient Temperature (°C) Electrical Schematic Pluggable Power OptoCoupler (Solid-State) Terminal Block Relays 3.70 (94.0) 3 3 3 3 3 A2 13+ A1 14 3.15 (80.0) 0.24 (6.
Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays 3.2 Contents High Current Terminal Block Relay Description Page Standard Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . High Current Terminal Block Relays Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.
Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays 3.2 Electrical Schematic 3 High Current Terminal Block Relays 3 3 3 3 A2 11 A1 14 3 3 3 12 3 3 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 High Current Terminal Block Relays 3 3 3 3 3 3.70 (94.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3.15 (80.0) 3 3 0.55 (14.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2015 www.eaton.
3.2 3 Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays XR Series Accessories Product Description 3 Power Terminal Block Product Selection Bridges 3 XR Series Accessories Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 3 2-Position Snap-In Jumper Red 10 XRAFBST2RD 3 Blue 10 XRAFBST2BU Gray 10 XRAFBST2GY 3 80-Position Snap-In Jumper 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 The XRAPLCESK power terminal block has the same shape as the relay modules and is used to feed in the bridging potentials. The nominal current is 32 A.
Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 Contents Programmable Relays Description Programmable Relays easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Contents easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays Description 3 Page easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.
3.
Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.
3.3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Technical Data and Specifications easy500 Series Type EASY512-AB… EASY512-AC… EASY512-DA… EASY512-DC-R… EASY512-DC-TC. 3 Supply voltage 24 Vac 100–240 Vac 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc Heat dissipation 5 VA 5 VA 2W 2W 2W 3 Continuous current outputs 1 8A 8A 8A 8A 0.5 A Short-circuit proof with power factor 1 Line protection B16, 600 A — Short-circuit proof with power factor 0.7…0.
Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 easy500 Series, Drawing Number MD05013001E 3 0.42 (10.8) 3 1.97 (50.0) easy500 3 3 3.54 (90.0) 3 4.02 (102.0) 1.77 (45.0) 3 4.33 (110.0) 3 0.18 (4.5) (M4) 0.157 Dia. (3.9) 1.87 (47.5) 3 1.41 (35.8) 2.81 (71.5) 2.22 (56.5) 2.28 (58.0) 3 3 easy700 Series, Drawing Number MD05013002E 0.64 (16.3) 2.96 (75.0) 3 0.64 (16.3) 3 easy700 3 3.54 (90.0) 3 4.02 (102.0) 1.77 (45.0) 3 4.
3.3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT Contents Description 3 Page easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . V7-T3-20 easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-27 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-27 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-28 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 Product Selection 3 Control relay for connection of SmartWire-DT and simultaneously for supply of power to the SmartWire-DT devices, such as switchgear and contactors.
3.
Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT, continued 3 Description Unit Specification Heat dissipation At 24 Vdc W easy802: max. 5 / easy806: max.
3.3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Contents easyRelay Expansion Modules Description 3 easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays .
3.3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Product Selection EASY618_ 3 Digital I/O Expansion Modules Can be used via easyLink.
3.3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) easy600 Series, Drawing Number MD05013002E 0.64 (16.3) 2.96 (75.0) 0.64 (16.3) easy600 3 3 3.54 (90.0) 3 4.02 (102.0) 1.77 (45.0) 3 4.33 (110.0) 3 3 3 3 3 0.18 (4.5) (M4) 1.87 (47.5) 4.23 (107.5) 2.22 (56.5) 2.28 (58.0) EASY202-RE/EASY200-EASY/EASY205-ASI Series, Drawing Number MD05013012E 3 3 0.157 Dia. (3.9) 0.30 (7.5) easy200 3 3 3.54 (90.0) 3 4.02 (102.0) 1.77 (45.0) 3 4.
Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 Contents MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays Description Page easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.
Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 Product Selection MFD-80-B 3 MFD-Titan Display/Operator Units Monochrome display 132 x 64 pixels with switchable backlight and removable front frame.
3.3 3 MFD-R16 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays MFD-Titan I/O Modules For use with MFD-Titan controller modules.
3.3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Technical Data and Specifications 3 MFD-80, MFD-CP4, MFD-CP8 Type MFD-80… MFD-CP4/CP8 Solid — 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) Flexible — 0.2–2.
3.3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) MFD-80 Series, Drawing Number MD05013005E 3 0.89 (22.5) MFD-80 3 0.67 (17.0) 0.88 + 0.02 (22.3) + 0.4 3 1.26 (32.0) 3 1.18 (30.0) 3 3.41 (86.5) 3 3 1.18 ± 0.01 (30.0) ± 0.2 3 3 MFD-CP… 0.79 (20.0) 1.18 (30.0) 0.54 (13.7) 1.11 (28.3) 1.11 (28.3) 2.44 (62.0) 3 MFD-80 Template for Holes, Scale 1:1 3.41 (86.
Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 MFD-CP8 Series, Drawing Number MD05013006E 3 MFD-CP8 2.95 (75.0) 0.64 (16.3) 3 0.640 (16.3) 3 3 3 3.54 (90.0) 3 3 3 0.18 (4.5) 1.18 ± 0.01 (30.0 ± 0.2) 1.53 (38.8) 1.53 (38.8) 3 1.16 (29.5) 3 3 4.23 (107.5) 3 MFD-R/MFD-T I/O Module, Drawing Number MD05013007E 3 MFD-R and MFD-T I/O 3 3 3.54 (90.0) 3 3 3.47 (88.1) 0.75 (19.0) 3 0.98 (25.
3.3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Contents easyRelay Communication Modules Description 3 Page easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Communication Modules Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Technical Data and Specifications 3 easy700/800/MFD Communication Interface Modules EASY204-DP, EASY205-ASI, EASY221-CO, EASY222-DN, EASY209-SE 1 Description 3 Specification Supply voltage 3 24 Vdc 2 1W 3 Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.
3.3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays EASY204-DP Series, Drawing Number MD05013011E 3 3 0.30 (7.5) EASY204-DP 3 3.54 (90.0) 4.02 (102.0) 4.33 (110.0) 3 1.77 (45.0) 3 3 3 3 0.18 (4.5) 3 1.87 (47.5) 2.22 (56.5) 3 (M4) 0.157 Dia. (3.9) 1.40 (35.5) 0.30 (7.5) 2.44 (62.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-42 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2015 www.eaton.
3.3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Contents easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories and Software Description Page easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories and Software Accessories . . .
3.3 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Bluetooth Adapter Conveniently commission and service machines and other equipment remotely. ● ● ● Simple communication An 8-digit PIN security Simple recognition in with easy800 or MFD-Titan code prevents Windows 7 from outside loud and/or unauthorized remote ● Full online functionality dangerous areas access with easySoft-Pro V6.
Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays EASY-M-32K EASY-M-256K 3.
3.3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Technical Data and Specifications easyRelay Power Supplies Type EASY200-POW EASY400-POW Supply voltage 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 85–264 Vac Maximum range 85–264 Vac Output voltage 24 Vdc (±3%) 24 Vdc (±3%) Output current (rated value) 0.25 A 1.25 A Overcurrent limitation form 0.3 A 1.4 A Short-circuit proof (secondary) Yes Yes 3 Overload proof Yes Yes 3 Potential isolation (prim/sec.
Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 EASY200-POW/EASY256-HCI and EASY400-POW Series, Drawing Number MD05013004E 3 EASY200-POW EASY256-HCI EASY400-POW 0.42 (10.8) 3 3 0.30 (7.5) 1.97 (50.0) 3 3 3.54 (90.0) 3.54 (90.0) 4.02 (102.0) 1.77 (45.0) 3 4.02 (102.0) 4.33 (110.0) 3 3 4.33 (110.0) 3 3 0.18 (4.5) 1.87 (47.5) 0.157 (M4) Dia. (3.9) 1.41 (35.8) 2.22 (56.5) 0.30 (7.5) 3 1.40 (35.5) 2.81 (71.
3.3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) SKF-HA Series, Drawing Number MD05013015E 0.43 (11.0) SKF-HA 3 3 3 2.60 (66.0) 1.89 (48.0) 3 3 3 3.23 (82.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Contents General Purpose Plug-In Relay Description D1RR/D1RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2RR/D2RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3RR/D3RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5RR/D5RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays General Purpose Plug-In Relays Relay Series D1RR/D1RF D2RR/D2RF D3RR/D3RF Note: UL when used with the appropriate socket. Note: UL when used with the appropriate socket. Note: UL when used with the appropriate socket.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays General Purpose Plug-In Relays, continued Relay Series D4 D5RR/D5RF 3 D7PR/D7PF 3 3 3 3 Approvals 3 3 Note: UL when used with the appropriate socket. Note: UL when used with the appropriate socket.
3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays General Purpose Plug-In Relays, continued Relay Series D8 D9 Dust cover Dust cover Panel, DIN and flange mounting Pushbutton available 3 3 3 3 3 Approvals 3 Features 3 3 3 3 Quick-connect and screw terminals Panel mounting Screw terminals Contact Data Configuration 4PST 3 SPST-NO DPST-NO NO NC Max.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Contents D1 Series Relay Description Page D1RR/D1RF Series Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2RR/D2RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.
3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Wiring Diagram D1RF/D1RR 3 12 1 14 5 11 9 3 3 3 3 3 A1 A2 3 13 14 IEC NEMA 3 3 3 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D1RF/D1RR 3 0.53 (14.0) 0.10 (2.1) 3 3 0.53 (14.0) 1.10 (27.9) 3 1.10 (27.9) 3 1.60 (40.6) 3 3 3 3 1.40 (35.5) D1RAA 1.18 (30.0) 0.74 (19.0) 0.67 (17.0) 3 3 14 5 12 1 1 3 0.16 (4.0) 3.14 (80.0) 3 9 A2 A1 Input Input 3 3 COM 14 13 Module Input 1.57 (40.0) 3 Input N.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Contents D2 Series Relay Description Page D1RR/D1RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2RR/D2RF Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays D2RF Series Relay 3.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 Accessories 3 D2RF/D2RR Sockets and Accessories 3 Type Socket 3 3 3 3 Mounting Style Wire Size Wire Connection Standard Pack Catalog Number B 300 12 DIN rail/panel 14/16 (2) AWG, 2.5/1.5 (2) mm2 Elevator 1 D2PAL 1 300 10 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 10 D2PA6 B 300 10 DIN rail/panel 14/16 (2) AWG, 2.5/1.5 (2) mm2 Elevator 1 D2PAP 1 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 Wiring Diagrams 3 D2RF2/D2RR2 3 3 12 42 1 4 14 44 5 8 11 41 9 12 A1 A2 13 14 3 3 3 3 IEC 3 3 3 3 NEMA D2RF4/D2RR4 12 22 32 42 1 2 3 4 14 24 34 44 5 6 7 8 11 21 31 41 9 10 11 12 A2 13 3 3 3 3 A1 3 IEC 14 NEMA 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-62 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2015 www.eaton.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D2RF2/D2RR2 3 0.27 (7.0) 0.83 (21.0) 0.02 (0.5) 3 0.83 (21.0) 3 1.10 (27.9) 3 1.10 (27.9) 3 0.24 (6.0) 1.54 (39.1) 0.24 (6.0) 1.40 (35.5) 3 3 D2RF4/D2RR4 0.27 (7.0) 0.83 (21.0) 0.02 (0.5) 3 0.83 (21.0) 3 1.10 (27.9) 0.24 (6.0) 1.54 (39.1) 3 1.10 (27.9) 3 3 0.24 (6.0) 1.40 (35.5) 3 D2PA6 3 0.71 (18.
3.4 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D2PA7 1.57 (40.0) 3 1.00 (25.4) 0.14 (3.8) 0.74 (19.0) 3 34 7 24 6 44 14 8 5 42 32 22 12 4 3 2 1 3 3 3.30 (84.0) 3 42 3 3.11 (79.0) 3 3 2.40 (61.0) 11 3 A2 3 7 6 44 14 8 5 32 22 A1 INPUT INPUT 14 13 41 31 21 12 11 10 12 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 12 11 10 9 3 4 N.C. N.O. COM 13 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 12 11 10 9 A2 21 31 INPUT 1.18 (30.0) 3 0.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D2PAP 2.40 (61.0) 3 3 0.74 (19.0) 3.34 (85.0) 41 31 21 11 12 11 10 9 44 34 24 14 8 7 6 5 42 32 22 12 4 3 2 1 41 31 21 11 12 11 10 9 3 44 34 24 14 8 7 6 5 3 42 32 22 12 4 3 2 1 0.20 (5.6) 3.11 (79.0) 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 12 11 10 9 14 13 N.C. N.O. COM 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 12 11 10 9 14 13 INPUT 3 N.C. N.O.
3.4 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D2PAL 2.40 (61.0) 3 1.06 (27.0) 0.74 (19.0) 3 3 41 11 12 9 44 14 42 3 3.34 (85.0) 3 3 11 12 9 44 14 8 5 42 12 4 1 5 8 3 41 12 4 1 0.20 (5.6) 3.11 (79.0) 4 1 8 5 12 9 14 13 N.C. N.O. COM INPUT 4 1 8 5 12 9 14 13 N.C. N.O. COM INPUT 3 3 MODULE INPUT 1.49 (38.0) 3 A2 IEC: 3 A1 A2 INPUT A1 MODULE INPUT 14 INPUT NEMA: 14 INPUT 13 3 3 IEC 0.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Contents D3 Series Relay Description Page D1RR/D1RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2RR/D2RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3RR/D3RF Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
3.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays D3 Series Relay 3.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 Accessories 3 D3RR/D3RF Series Sockets and Accessories 3 Type Socket 3 3 Module Size Nominal Current Mounting Style Wire Size Wire Connection Standard Pack Catalog Number A 300 16 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 1 D3PA6 1 A 300 12 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Elevator 10 D3PAL8 1 None 300/600 15/10 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.
3.4 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D3RR2/D3RF2 3 3 1.39 (35.3) 3 3 0.24 (6.1) 3 1.37 (34.8) 2.20 (55.2) 3 12 3 14 3 A1 22 5 4 24 3 A2 2 6 7 31 1 IEC 3 1.37 (34.8) 2.10 (50.3) 11 3 3 1.39 (35.3) 8 NEMA D3RR3/D3RF3 3 1.39 (35.3) 3 1.39 (35.3) 3 3 0.24 (6.1) 3 1.37 (34.8) 2.20 (55.2) 3 21 22 24 14 3 34 A1 A2 11 3 3 31 IEC 6 5 32 12 3 1.37 (34.8) 2.10 (50.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D3PA2 0.97 (24.6) 3 1.60 (40.0) 0.59 (15.0) 3 1.29 (33.0) 3 A1 7 0.16 (4.2) 8 1 2 2.02 (51.0) INPUT 2.12 (54.0) 3 1.01 (25.6) 5 6 11 2 3 21 1 8 4 5 12 22 A2 2 INPUT INPUT 8 1 1 INPUT 8 7 2 7 6 3 6 4 3 7 3 3 3 5 4 14 24 4 3 3 6 5 NEMA IEC 3 3 D3PA3 3 2.32 (59.0) 0.97 (24.6) 3 2.06 (52.0) 3 3 1 1.60 Dia. (40.0) 14 10 3 4 1.02 (25.0) 2.05 (52.
3.4 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D3PA6 1.45 (37.0) 3 1.42 (36.0) 1.10 (27.9) 3 11 22 3 3 2.86 (72.0) 3 11 12 5 1 4 1 12 4 22 5 24 21 14 24 21 14 6 8 3 6 8 3 0.15 (3.8) 3.00 (76.0) 4 5 3 7 3 1.58 (40.0) 3 6 2 7 3 2 1 8 MODULE INPUT MODULE INPUT IEC: NEMA: 3 A2 A2 Coil Jumper Buss A1 INPUT A1 INPUT INPUT 3 7 2 Coil Jumper Buss INPUT 7 IEC 3 2 NEMA 1.20 (30.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D3PAL8 3 0.86 (22.0) 22 24 12 3 14 22 24 6 5 4 14 12 6 5 4 3 3 3 3 2.95 (75.0) 0.12 (3.10) 5 INPUT A2 3 6 3 3 7 2 7 2 3 21 11 8 7 1 2 A2 21 A1 11 INPUT INPUT 0.12 (30.0) 1.06 (27.0) 3 MODULE INPUT 3 A1 A2 7 1 MODULE INPUT 2 IEC: NEMA: A2 8 1 INPUT A1 7 A2 3 4 6 8 1.45 (37.0) 5 4 7 8 7 1 3 2 INPUT INPUT IEC 3 NEMA 3 1.49 (38.
3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Contents D4 Series Relay Description 3 Page D1RR/D1RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2RR/D2RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3RR/D3RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5RR/D5RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 D4 Series 3 Description 3 Rated load 30 Vdc 10 A 30 Vdc 5 A 3 Carry current 10 A 10 A Max. operating voltage 380 Vac/125 Vdc 380 Vac/125 Vdc Max. operating current 10 A 10 A Contact material AgCdO AgCdO Max. switching capacity 2500 VA 1875 VA 300 W 150 W Min. permissible load 100 mA, 5 Vdc 100 mA, 5 Vdc Pickup voltage (max.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Dimensions 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D4PR1 3 D4PR2 0.51 (13.0) Max. 1.14 (29.0) Max. 0.10 (2.5) 0.39 (10.0) 0.08 (2.0) 1.14 (29.0) Max. 0.79 (20.0) 0.51 (13.0) Max. 1.14 (29.0) Max. 0.01 (2.5) 3 0.39 (10.0) 3 1.10 (28.0) Max. 0.79 (20.0) 0.08 (2.0) 3 0.02 (0.5) 0.19 (4.8) 0.24 (6.0) 0.16 (4.0) 0.02 (0.5) 5 – 0.035 x 0.12 (0.9 x 3) Elliptic Holes 0.35 (8.9) 0.30 (7.5) 0.20 (5.2) 0.20 (5.2) 2 4 3 0.02 (0.
3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Contents D5 Series Relay Description 3 Page D1RR/D1RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2RR/D2RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3RR/D3RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5RR/D5RF Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.
3.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Accessories 3 D5 Sockets and Accessories Type Module Size Nominal Voltage (Max. for Sockets) Nominal Current Mounting Style Wire Size Socket A 300 25 DIN rail 10 /14 (2) AWG, 6/2.5 (2) mm2 Metal spring clip mm2 Wire Connection Standard Pack Catalog Number Elevator 10 D5PAL 1 Screw clamping 10 D5PA2 D5PA3L None 300 15 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.
3.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Wiring Diagrams 3 D5PA3L and D5PA3S 22 32 12 N.C. 34 14 24 N.O. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 N.C. 3 3 N.O.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 Dimensions 3 D5RR and D5RF Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 3 1.40 (35.4) 1.40 (35.4) 3 3 0.20 (6.1) 3 1.37 (34.9) D5PA2 3 1.69 (43.0) 1.53 (39.0) 1.03 (26.0) 1.37 (35.0) 6 3 24 34 14 6 5 4 2 3 1 0.40 (10.0) 3 5 3 4 3 1.97 (50.0) 1.37 (34.9) 2.10 (53.1) 22 32 12 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 6 5 4 6 5 4 8 7 8 7 3 0.15 (3.8) 3 3.00 (76.0) 3 9 3.14 (80.0) 3 B 3 1.50 (38.0) 3 B N.C.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D5PA3L and D5PA3S 0.30 (7.5) 3 0.87 (22.2) 1.50 (38.1) 3 3 0.02 (0.5) 1.25 (31.7) 2 1 2.03 (51.0) 1.37 (34.7) 4 5 7 3 3 3 6 8 9 3 1.68 (42.8) A 3 B 3 0.29 (7.5) 0.50 (2.5) 0.16 Dia. (4.2) 2 Holes 3 Recommended Chassis Cutout 0.28 (5.3) 0.87 (22.2) 3 0.16 (3.9) Dia. Holes 3 3 0.63 (16.2) 0.24 (6.1) 1.37 (34.7) Solder Type Terminals 1.68 (42.6) 0.13 (3.3) 3 3 1.27 (32.
3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D5PAL 3 2.48 (63.0) 3 3 3 3 3.70 (96.0) 3 21 9 31 8 11 7 21 31 11 9 8 7 24 6 34 5 14 4 24 34 14 6 5 4 22 3 32 2 12 1 22 32 12 3 2 1 3 3.62 (92.0) 6 8 9 N.C. 4 N.O. 5 1 2 3 6 8 9 7 N.C. 4 N.O. 5 1 2 7 COM 3 B COM B A A INPUT 3 INPUT MODULE INPUT MODULE INPUT 3 A2 3 7 IEC: NEMA: INPUT 3 A1 2 A2 Coil Jumper Buss A1 INPUT 1.40 (36.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Contents D7 Series Relay Description Page D1RR/D1RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2RR/D2RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3RR/D3RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5RR/D5RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D7PR/D7PF Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . .
3.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays D7 Series Relay 3.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 Accessories 3 D7 Sockets and Accessories 3 Type Socket 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Flange mount adapter Wire Size Wire Connection Standard Pack Catalog Number B 300 16 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping — D7PAA 1 None 300 10 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 1 D7PA9 A 300 16 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.
3.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.
3.4 3 Dimensions 3 D7PR1/D7PF1 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 0.27 (7.0) 3 0.83 (21.0) 0.29 (7.4) 0.02 (0.5) 3 0.83 (21.0) 0.29 (7.4) 0.02 (0.5) 1.10 (27.9) 3 3 0.19 (4.8) 1.54 (39.1) 3 1.10 (27.9) 0.19 (4.8) 1.40 (35.5) 0.16 (4.7) 0.38 (9.9) 3 0.23 (5.9) 3 0.30 (7.5) 3 3 0.08 (2.1)2X 3 0.55 (14.1) 3 3 D7PR2/D7PF2 0.27 (7.0) 3 0.83 (21.0) 0.29 (7.4) 0.02 (0.5) 3 0.83 (21.0) 0.29 (7.4) 0.02 (0.5) 1.10 (27.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D7PR3/D7PF3 1.20 (30.8) 0.26 (6.6) 0.27 (7.0) 0.02 (0.5) 3 0.02 (0.5) 1.10 (27.9) 1.60 (40.0) 3 1.20 (30.8) 0.29 (7.4) 1.10 (27.9) 0.19 (4.8) 3 3 0.19 (4.8) 1.40 (35.5) 3 3 0.39 (9.9) 3 0.19 (4.7) 0.23 (5.9) 0.26 (6.7) 0.39 (9.9) 3 3 3 0.39 (9.9)2X 3 0.79 (20.0) 3 3 D7PR4/D7PF4 1.60 (40.6) 0.26 (6.6) 0.27 (7.0) 0.29 (7.4) 0.02 (0.5) 1.60 (40.6) 3 1.10 (27.9) 1.54 (39.
3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D7PA3 D7PA4 3 1 1 10 4 3 5 8 6 9 7 2 6 3 3 11 Wiring Diagram (Top View) 3 11 3 12 4 14 Wiring Diagram (Top View) 2.74 (69.8) 2.58 (67.5) Max. 1.09 (27.8) Max. 0.65 (16.6) 3 1.09 (27.8) Max. 0.65 (16.6) Combination Slotted/Phillips Head Screws 6-32 x 5/16" 3 3 10 8 3 3 9 2.74 (69.8) 2.58 (67.5) Max. 3 3 13 2 5 3 3 7 1.44 (36.6) 1.27 (32.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D7PA9 Standard Mount 3 0.71 (18.0) 3 5 44 14 8 5 1 42 12 4 1 8 4 2.52 (64.0) 2.73 (69.0) 8 5 12 9 14 1.26 (32.0) N.C. N.O. COM 4 1 8 5 12 9 3 N.C. N.O. 3 COM 3 13 A2 A1 41 11 INPUT INPUT 14 13 14 13 12 9 INPUT 3 3 INPUT 13 9 12 1.02 (26.0) 1 3 3 0.16 (4.0) 14 4 3 IEC 3 3 NEMA 3 1.03 (26.0) 3 1.17 (29.
3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D7PAA 3 1.18 (30.0) 3 0.74 (19.0) 3 3 44 14 8 5 42 12 4 1 3 3 3 3.14 (80.0) 0.16 (4.0) 3 3.33 (84.0) 3 2.67 (68.0) 44 14 8 5 42 12 4 1 4 1 8 5 12 9 14 13 3 N.C. N.O. COM INPUT 4 1 8 5 12 9 14 13 1.57 (40.0) 3 3 3 INPUT A2 IEC: NEMA: INPUT A1 14 13 41 11 12 9 0.24 (6.0) A2 A1 INPUT 14 41 11 12 IEC 3 1.06 (26.0) 3 1.18 (30.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D7PAB 3 1.18 (30.0) 0.74 (19.0) 1.10 (28.0) 44 3 24 3 14 8 6 5 42 22 12 4 2 1 44 24 14 8 6 5 42 22 12 4 2 1 3 3.14 (80.0) 0.16 (4.0) 4 2 1 8 6 5 12 10 9 14 13 2.67 (68.0) 3.33 (84.0) N.C. N.O. COM INPUT 4 2 1 8 6 5 12 10 9 14 N.O. COM A2 INPUT INPUT A2 A1 14 13 41 21 11 12 10 9 A1 14 INPUT 0.24 (6.
3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D7PAD 3 1.18 (30.0) 0.74 (19.0) 3 3 44 1.41 (36.0) 3 3 34 42 44 34 24 14 8 7 6 5 42 32 22 12 4 3 2 1 3 24 32 14 22 12 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 12 11 10 9 N.C. N.O. COM INPUT MODULE INPUT 3 0.16 (4.0) A2 3.33 (84.0) 3 A1 INPUT 2.67 (68.0) 3 11 IEC 3.14 (80.0) 3 21 31 41 8 5 6 7 IEC: NEMA: 1.57 (40.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Contents D8 Series Relay Description D1RR/D1RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2RR/D2RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3RR/D3RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5RR/D5RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Technical Data and Specifications 3 Coil Resistance 3 Coil Voltage Ohms mA 24 Vac 303 71 110/120 Vac 5260 20.4 220/240 Vac 21,000 10.2 12 Vdc 75 158 24 Vdc 303 79 Description D8PR6 D8PR7 Rated load 220 Vac 30 A 220 Vac 25 A Carry current 30 A 25 A Max. operating voltage 250 Vac 250 Vac 3 3 3 3 D8 Relays 3 3 3 Max. switching current 30 A 25 A Contact material AgCdO AgCdO Max.
3.4 3 General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D8PR7TF 3 2.70 (68.5) Max. 2.36 (60.0) 3 1.99 (50.5) Max. 0.25 (6.4) 3 3 Control Relays and Timers 0.43 (11.0) 1.32 (33.5) Max. 0.03 (0.8) 3 3 1.85 (47.0) Max. 0.12 (3.0) 6 8 2.362 0.007 (60.0 0.2) Mounting Holes (Bottom View) Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes or M4 Tapped Holes 1.99 (50.5) Max. 0.25 (6.4) 0.43 (11.0) 1.32 (33.5) Max. 0.03 (0.8) 0.08 (2.0) 0 1 4 6 2.09 (53.0) Max.
3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D8PA2 3 Two M3.5 Screws for Coil 0.31 (8.0) 3 Two M4 or 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes 3 2.03 (51.5) Max. Four M4 Screws for Contact 0.36 (9.2) 1.574 0.003 (40.0 0.1) 0.98 (25.0) 1.81 (46.0) Max. 2.19 (55.5) Max. 3 1.574 0.003 (40.0 0.1) 0.20 (5.0) 3 3 Mounting Holes (Bottom View) 3 3 3 3 D8PA5 PFP-M DIN Rail End Stop Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes 1.57 (40.0) M4 Spring Washer 0.94 0.70 (24.
3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Contents D9 Series Relay Description 3 Page D1RR/D1RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2RR/D2RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3RR/D3RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5RR/D5RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.
3.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 Mounting Bracket 1.37 (35.0) 3 Two M4 or 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Mounting Holes 3 Two M4 3 0.95 (24.0) 3 1.378 0.004 (35.0 1.0) 1.18 (30.0) 3 0.35 (9.0) 1.10 (28.0) 1.14 (29.0) 3 0.28 (7.0) 3 3 1.73 (44.0) 0.17 (4.4) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2015 www.eaton.
3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Contents Accessories Description 3 D1RR/D1RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2RR/D2RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3RR/D3RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5RR/D5RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 MOD Modules 3 Eaton’s relay accessories provide a complete solution for add-on modules and identification tags.
3.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Relay Clips Eaton offers a variety of relay clips designed to improve the performance and functionality within an electrical panel. Metal Hold-Down Clips Metal hold-down clips, or spring clips, are ideal for use where high heat or humid conditions are a factor. These clips hold their shape and tension and are designed to withstand harsh environments. All clips are made of corrosionresistant stainless steel.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Plastic Ejector/ Hold-Down Clips These clips are great for applications where sockets are located in dense or tight areas. They allow for quick, safe and firm securing of relays in the sockets with the added benefit that the relay can be ejected with one finger. Plastic clips also aid in keeping operators’ fingers away from live circuits.
3.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Coil Bus Jumpers Eaton’s coil bus jumpers allow inputs to be bridged to adjacent sockets without additional wiring, making multi-relay connections quick and easy. The easy-to-install design requires no tools and can be complete in a matter of seconds.
Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Flange Mount Adapters Eaton’s relay flange mount adapters create a modular approach to flexible mounting options. Each lowcost adapter allows for panel mounting of a standard control relay and can eliminate the need for a socket. PFC-D11 Unit with Flange Mount Adapter PFC-D2D72 3.
3.5 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Open Style Relays Contents 9575H Series 3000 Relay Description 3 9575H Series 3000—Type AA, AC and DC Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Open Style Relays Product Selection 3 When Ordering, Specify Catalog number and magnet coil code letter. Example: for DPDT relay with auxiliary switch and a 120 V 50/60 Hz coil, order Catalog Number 9575H3A010.
3.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Open Style Relays Technical Data and Specifications Relay Specifications Dielectric Withstanding Voltage Between open contacts: 1500 Vrms ● All other mutually insulated conductive elements: 2200 Vrms ● Coil ● Pull-in voltage: 80% DC coils, 85% AC coils of nominal voltage or less at 25ºC ● Dropout voltage: 10% of nominal voltage or more at 25ºC ● Coil resistance: ±10% measured at 25ºC ● Max.
3.5 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Open Style Relays Dimensions 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 9575H3 DPDT Relay 3 9575H2449 3.31 (84.2) Mounting Holes 0.187 (4.75) Dia. (2 Places) 3 1.88 (47.6) 8-32 Machine Screw on Contact Terminals (6 Places) 0.218 (5.5) Dia. 0.56 (4.3) 3 0.230 (5.8) Square Hole 3 2.25 (58.7) Max. 3 3.55 (90.1) 1.87 (47.5) 0.38 (9.5) 2.50 (63.5) 1.62 (41.1) 3 0.159 (4) Dia. 10-32 Tap Typ. 4 Places 3 4.50 (114.3) 3.12 (79.2) Max.
3.6 3 Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays Contents Solid-State Relays Description 3 Page Solid-State Relays D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays 3.6 Contents D93 Series—Solid-State Relays Description Page 3 3 D93 Series Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.6 Temperature Derating Curves 10 Amp Styles 3 3 3 90 6" x 6" x 1/8" aluminum plate 14 Load Current (amps rms) 3 40 and 50 Amp Styles 16 3 3 Solid-State Relays 12 Heat sink with 1°C/W thermal resistance 10 8 6 4 Free air mounting 0.14°C/W (50A) 50 5" x 6" x 1/8" aluminum plate 40 30 20 0 0 20° 3 70 10 2 3 Mounted on heat sink with 1°C/W thermal resistance 80 Load Current (amps rms) 3 Control Relays and Timers 40° 60° 80° 20° 100° 40° 60° 80° 100° Max.
Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays 3.6 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D93 Series 3 2.28 (57.9) 3 Screw Terminals 0.66 (16.8) 3 0.18 (4.4) 0.6 (15.1) 3 1.74 (44.1) 3 3 1.87 (47.5) 1.4 (35.9) 3 3 3 2.28 (57.9) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2015 www.eaton.
3.6 3 Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays Contents D96 Series—Solid-State Relays Description 3 3 Page D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D96 Series V7-T3-123 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-131 V7-T3-132 V7-T3-134 V7-T3-135 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays 3.6 Product Selection D96115ACZ3 3 D96 Series 3 Input Voltage Output Voltage Contact Configuration Switching Type Rated Current Load (Amps) 3.5–32 Vdc 3–50 Vdc SPST-NO DC switch 15 D96115ACZ3 3.
3.
3.6 Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays Temperature Derating Curves 3 15 Amp Style 35 24 3 30 18 3 15 3 12 3 Current (amps DC) Load Current (amps rms) 8 Amp Style 25 20 15 9 10 8 6 5 3 1.5 0 0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 85° 80° 90° Max. Ambient Temperature (°C) 3 3 3 0 0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 80° 90° 3 Ambient Temperature (°C) 3 3 Load Current (amps rms) 10 Amp Style 14 3 12 3 10 3 8 3 6 3 4 3 1.
3.6 3 Dimensions 3 D96 Series 3 0.69 (17.6) 3 0.20 (5.0) Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 0.20 (5.0) 0.07 (1.7) 3 3 0.56 (14.2) 3 3.54 (90.0) 1.78 (45.3) 3 1.40 (35.6) 3.64 (92.4) 2.63 (66.8) 3 1.39 (35.2) 3 3 3 0.27 (6.9) 3 0.63 (16.0) 1.36 (34.6) 0.13 (3.4) 0.56 (14.3) 2.56 Max. (65.0) 3 0.24 (6.0) 3 3 0.62 (15.8) 0.55 (14.
Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays 3.6 Contents D99 Series—Solid-State Relays Description Page D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D99 Series V7-T3-123 V7-T3-130 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-136 V7-T3-137 V7-T3-140 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.6 3 Dimensions 3 D99 Series Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays Output – 3 2 Input 3 + 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 3.20 (80.0) 3 1.20 (30.0) 3 1.20 (30.0) 3 3 3 0.05 (1.20) 4.20 (107.0) 3 3 3 3 3.10 (77.5) 0.20 (5.0) Radius 3 3 0.20 (5.0) Radius 0.50 (11.9) 3 3 3.70 (92.9) 3 4.00 (102.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-140 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2015 www.eaton.
Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3.7 Contents Machine Tool Relays Description Machine Tool Relays D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole . . . . . . BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole with Convertible Contacts . . . . . .
3.7 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Contents D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole Description 3 Page D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3.7 Product Selection 3 When Ordering, Specify Catalog number and magnet coil code letter. Example: For a four-pole relay having 4NO contacts with a 120 V 60 Hz coil, order Catalog Number D15CR40AB.
3.7 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Accessories C320 Pneumatic Timer Attachment 3 3 Pneumatic Timer Attachment C32MP1 Metal Mounting Plate Timing Range Catalog Number Description Catalog Number 0.1 to 30 seconds C320TP1 Metal mounting plate C321MP1 10 to 180 seconds C320TP2 Maximum Ampere Ratings 3 Volts AC 3 3 3 3 3 240 480 600 30 15 7.5 6 Break 3 1.5 0.75 0.
Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays AC/DC Interface Module— Controller Coil Voltage Ranges C320DC Controller Catalog Number Prefix Controller Size or Rating Coil Range Volts AC AE16, AE17, AE56, AE57, CE15, CE55 A–F 24–240 G–K 48–240 AN16, AN56, CN15, CN55 CN35 L–N 110–240 00–0 24–240 1–2 48–240 3 110–240 10–30 A 24–240 60 A 48–240 100 A 110–240 The Catalog Number C320DC Interface Module is an optically isolated solid-state switch that provides a means of operating AC co
3.7 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3 Dimensions 3 D15 Four-Pole Relay 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 0.54 (13.7) 0.54 (13.7) 1.8 (45.7) 3 C 3 3 2.36 (59.9) Frt. Mtd. Acc. Side Mtd. Blk. 2.96 (75.2) 3 3 3 3 3 3 1.36 (34.5) Optional Additional Contact Poles or Accessories Mtg. Holes for M4 or #8 Screws D15 Six- and Eight-Pole Relays 0.54 (13.7) 0.54 (13.7) 1.8 (45.7) 3 4.66 (118.4) 3 3 2.36 (59.9) Frt. Mtd. Acc. Side Mtd. Blk. 2.96 (75.2) 3 3 3 1.36 (34.
Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control 3.7 Contents Description D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole . . . . . . . . . BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Product Selection 3 When Ordering, Specify ● Catalog number of basic relay ● If a coil voltage other than listed is required, select the suffix code from the Coil Voltage table and substitute it for the last letter in the catalog number.
Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3.7 When Ordering, Specify ● Catalog number of basic relay ● If a coil voltage other than listed is required, select the suffix code from the Coil Voltage table and substitute it for the last letter in the catalog number.
3.7 3 Permanent Magnet Latch, Relay Mounted 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Permanent Magnet Latch Coil Volts Coil Hz Catalog Number 24 60 BFMLI 2 48 60 BFMLJ 2 110/120 50/60 BFMLF 220/240 50/60 BFMLG AC Relays 3 3 3 DC Relays 3 24 — BFMLL 48 — BFMLM 3 120 — BFMLS 240 — BFMLT 3 3 Options 3 FASTON Push-On Terminals 3 Description 3 Insert letter F after relay type designation in listed catalog number.
Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3.7 Technical Data and Specifications 3 General Specifications 3 BF Relay Electrical Ratings—NEMA A300 Maximum Current Maximum VA Volts Cont. Make Break Make Break 120 10 60 6 7200 720 240 10 30 3 7200 720 Horsepower Ratings (UL Recognized) 3 3 3 DC Rating—NEMA P300 AC Volts Maximum Current Phase 115 230 Volts Cont. Make Break Max. Make or Break (VA) 3 1 1/6 1/2 125 5.0 1.1 1.1 138 3 3 — 1 250 5.0 0.55 0.
3.7 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Contact Arrangements—BF and BFD Relays 2 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 3 3 6 Poles 8 Poles 3 3 3 Rear Rear Front Front 3 10 Poles 12 Poles 3 Rear Rear 3 Center Center 3 Front Front 3 3 3 Note: NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed Dimensions 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 BF Relay with Permanent Magnet Latch and SolidState Timer BFD Relay with Solid-State Timer Enclosures—NEMA 1 for BF, BFD, AR and ARD 2.83 (71.
Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control 3.7 Contents Description Page D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole . . . . . . . . . BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Product Selection 3 When Ordering, Specify ● Catalog number of basic relay with 120/60, 110/50 AC coil from AR/ARD Relays table. ● If a coil voltage other than listed is required, select the suffix code from the Coil Voltage table below and substitute it for the last letter in the catalog number. Example: AR64V for a 110/60 AC coil.
3.
3.7 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 General 3 3 3 3 Contact Ratings—600 Vac Cartridge NEMA A600 Maximum Current Maximum VA Volts Cont. Make Break Make Break 120 10 60 6 7200 720 240 10 30 3 7200 720 480 10 15 1.5 7200 720 600 10 12 1.2 7200 720 DC Cartridges—NEMA P600 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Maximum Current Maximum VA Volts Continuous Make or Break Make or Break 125 5 1.10 138 250 5 0.55 138 600 5 0.
Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3.7 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 Four- and Six-Pole with Four-Pole Adder, Solid-State Timer and Mechanical Latch 3 4.09 (103.9) 2.88 (73.2) 3 3.44 (87.4) 2.75 (69.9) 2.88 (73.2) Latch S.S. Timer 3 Adder Deck 3 3 Base Relay 3 D C B 3 A 3 3.13 (79.5) 1.44 (36.6) CL of Mounting Slots (2) for 0.164 Screws End View, 4- and 6-Pole CL of Mounting Slots (2) for 0.164 Screws Side View, 4-Pole 2.05 (52.
3.7 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts Contents Description 3 Page D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole . . . . . . . . . BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts Product Selection . . . . . . .
Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3.7 Product Selection 3 Complete AC Relays 3 When Ordering, Specify ● Catalog number and magnet coil suffix letter. ● Example: For a 4-pole relay having 4NO contacts, order Catalog Number D26MR40, with a 120 V, 60 Hz coil, order D26MR40A. ● For fast delivery and minimum inventory, it is recommended that component parts or complete relays with NO poles be ordered.
3.7 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Relay Component Parts Location Relay Base Assembly D26MF Front Attachment Timer Attachments or Mechanical Latch 3 Relay Base Assembly (without Poles) Description Catalog Number Relay base assembly D26MB 4 3 D26MD10 Front Deck D26MF Front Attachment Pneumatic Timer or Mechanical Latch 3 3 D26MB Relay Base Assembly Basic four-pole D26 relay without contacts.
Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Relay State Indicating Light Relay State Indicating Light Manual Test Accessory Manual Test Accessory 3 Description Catalog Number Description Catalog Number 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz D26MAP120 Manual test accessory D26MTA 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz D26MAP240 Light provided with leads and bracket for mounting on twoto 12-pole relays.
3.7 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3 Dimensions 3 AC and DC D26 Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D26MAS1 A 1 Slot #10 Screw 0.44 (11.2) 3 3 3 3.50 (88.9) 3.13 (79.5) 2 Holes #10 Screw 3 3 3 0.75 (19.1) D26MAS2 2.38 (60.5) Max. 3 3 3 0.44 (11.2) AC Relay D26 DC Relay D26 Dimension A Ship. Wt. Lbs (kg) 1–4 poles 1–3 poles 4.00 (101.6) 2.5 (1.1) 1–4 poles with timer D26 or D87 1–3 poles with timer D26 or D87 6.00 (152.4) 3.3 (1.
3.7 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole with Convertible Contacts Contents Description Page D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole . . . . . . . . . BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Product Selection Complete DC Relays When Ordering, Specify ● Catalog number and magnet coil suffix letter. ● Example: For a 4-pole relay having 4NO contacts, order Catalog Number D26MRD40, with a 120 Vdc coil, order D26MRD40A1.
Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3-Pole with Timer Attachment 3.7 Relay with Pneumatic Timer Attachment (without Relay Contacts) 3 Contact Positions 1 Timer Operation Catalog Number 3 3 ON delay D26MRD005 3 OFF delay D26MRD006 3 3 The relays listed above will accept up to three catalog number D26MPR contacts (convertible—NO or NC) for instantaneous operation. Order contacts separately. For additional information on timer attachment, see Page V7-T3-161.
3.7 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3 Dimensions 3 AC and DC D26 Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D26MAS1 A 1 Slot #10 Screw 0.44 (11.2) 3 3 3 3.50 (88.9) 3.13 (79.5) 2 Holes #10 Screw 3 3 3 0.75 (19.1) D26MAS2 2.38 (60.5) Max. 3 3 3 0.44 (11.2) AC Relay D26 DC Relay D26 Dimension A Ship. Wt. Lbs (kg) 1–4 poles 1–3 poles 4.00 (101.6) 2.5 (1.1) 1–4 poles with timer D26 or D87 1–3 poles with timer D26 or D87 6.00 (152.4) 3.3 (1.
3.8 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Contents Timing Relays Description Page Timing Relays Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 3 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Product Overview Timer Function Descriptions Function #1—Universal TR, TMR5, E5-248 Asymmetrical Flasher, Pause First Repeat Cycle, OFF/ON Delay Function #4—Universal TR ON Delay and Single Shot Leading Edge Voltage Controlled When the supply voltage U is applied, the set interval t1 begins. After the interval t1 has expired, the output relay R switches into ON position and the set interval t2 begins.
3.8 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Function #7—Universal TR Pulse Sequence Monitoring Function #10—Universal TR, TRF, TMR5, TMRP, E5-248 OFF Delay/Signal OFF Delay Delay ON Release When the supply voltage U is applied, the set interval t1 begins and the output relay R switches to the ON position. After the interval t1 has expired, the interval t2 begins. As long as the control switch S is closed and opened within the interval t2, the relay will remain in the ON position.
3.8 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Function #13—Universal TR ON Delay Control Signal Start, Trailing Edge OFF Function #16—TRN, TMRP Flasher, ON First Cycle 3 (Power Start, ON First) The supply voltage U must be constantly applied to the device. When the control switch S is applied, the set interval t begins. After the interval t has expired, the output relay R switches to the ON position.
3.8 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Function #19—TRF, E5-248 Flasher—Control Signal Start, ON First Function #22—TMRP, E5-248 Single Pulse Generator, Voltage Controlled 3 The supply voltage U must be constantly applied to the device. When the control switch S is closed, the relay switches to the ON position and set interval t begins.
3.8 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Contents Universal TR Series Description 3 Page Universal TR Series Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays 3.
3.8 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Universal TR Timing Relays, continued Description TRL04 TRL07 TRL27 TRW27 Base accuracy ±1% of maximum scale value ±1% of maximum scale value ±1% of maximum scale value ±1% of maximum scale value Adjustment accuracy <5% of maximum scale value <5% of maximum scale value <5% of maximum scale value <5% of maximum scale value Repetition accuracy <0.5% or ±5 ms <0.5% or ±5 ms <0.5% or ±5 ms <0.5% or ±5 ms Temperature influence <0.
Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays 3.8 Dimensions 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 17.5 mm (TRL04 and TRL07) 3 35 mm (TRL27 and TRW27) 3 3 3.43 1.77 (45.0) (87.0) 1.77 3.43 (45.0) (87.0) 3 3 3 0.20 (5.0) 1.73 (44.0) 2.36 (60.0) 0.69 (17.5) 0.20 (5.0) 1.73 (44.0) 2.36 (60.0) 3 1.38 (35.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2015 www.eaton.
3.8 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Contents TR Series Description 3 Page Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.
3.8 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) General Description Specification 3 Operation system Solid-state CMOS circuit Time range 0.
Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays 3.8 Contents TMR5 Series Description Page Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR5 Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . .
3.8 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Catalog Number Selection All configurations from Catalog Number Selection are available.
3.
3.8 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) TMR5 3 Dual Knob Only 3 3 2.40 (61.0) 3 3 2.90 (73.7) 1.70 (43.2) 3 3.50 (88.9) 3 3 3 3 3 D3PA2 Socket D3PA3 Socket 6–32 x 0.312 Combination Head Screw and Pressure Clamping Plate (8 places) 6–32 x 0.312 Combination Head Screw and Pressure Clamp (11 places) Two 0.165 (4.2) Dia. Slots 2.14 (54.3) 2.03 (51.6) 3 1.30 (33.0) 1.60 (40.6) Max. 3 3 3 0.82 (20.8) 0.58 (14.7) 0.97 (24.
Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays 3.8 Contents TMR6 Series Description Page Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR6 Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Catalog Number Selection Wiring Diagram All configurations from Catalog Number Selection are available.
Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays 3.8 Contents TMRP Series Description Page Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMRP Series Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Product Selection TMRP Timing Relays TMRP5100 Supply Voltage 3 Description Catalog Number Control switch trigger, DPDT TMRP5100 Control switch trigger, SPDT TMRP5101 Power trigger, DPDT TMRP5102 10-Function 3 12–240 Vac/Vdc 3 3 3 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 TMRP Timing Relays 3 3 3 3 3 Description TMRP5100 Functions 1 TMRP5101 TMRP5102 A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J A, B, C Time range 0.
Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays 3.8 Wiring Diagrams TMRP5100 TMRP5101 Instant if 6–7 Shorted 6 5 7 4 8 3 9 2 10 1 11 5 3 6 2 7 1 3 External Control Switch External Control Switch 4 3 TMRP5102 8 4 6 2 7 3 3 8 3 INPUT 3 1 INPUT 5 3 3 3 INPUT 3 Dimensions 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 TMRP Series 3 4 5 2.83 (71.9) 1 OUTPUT TIME SET 0 0 3 S 3 3 8 9 3 2 3.15 (80.0) 3 10 0.64 (16.3) 4 0.25 (6.4) 5 0 3 8-Pin Octal Base 6 A 1.
3.9 3 Control Relays and Timers Alternating Relays Contents D85 Series—Alternating Relays Description 3 Page D85 Series—Alternating Relays Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Relays and Timers Alternating Relays 3.
3.
3.
3.9 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Alternating Relays Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D85 Series—Alternating Relays 3 3 3 2.4 (60) 3 3 1.7 (43) 3 2.9 (74) 3.1 (79) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-192 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2015 www.eaton.
Control Relays and Timers Safety Relays 3.10 Contents Safety Relays Description Page Safety Relays Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Safety Relays Product Selection Safety Relays Technical Overview Safety Safety Output (NO) Output Output (NO) (Delayed) Delay Feedback Control Output Voltage Removable Terminal Type of Blocks Unit Catalog Number 1 — 24 Vac/Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NO-41-24VAC-DC 1 — 24 Vac/Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NO-21-24VAC-DC 1 — 24 Vac/Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC — 1 — 230 Vac ■ Main ESR5-NO-31-230VAC — — 1 — 24–230 Vac/Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NO-31-AC-DC 2 2 0.
3.10 Control Relays and Timers Safety Relays Technical Data and Specifications 3 Safety Relay Description Unit 3 ESR5-NO-21_ ESR5-NO-41_ ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC ESR5-NZ-21_ Standards EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, UL/CUL listed EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, UL/CUL listed EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, UL/CUL listed EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, UL/CUL listed Type-dependent standards — — — EN 574 Part no.
3.10 3 Control Relays and Timers Safety Relays Safety Relay, continued Description Unit ESR5-NO-21_ ESR5-NO-41_ ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC ESR5-NZ-21_ 3 Power Supply Circuit Actuating voltage 50/60 Hz Vac 24 24 24 24 3 Actuating voltage—Us Vdc 24 24 24 24 Voltage tolerance pick-up voltage xe 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 3 Power consumption AC operated 50/60 Hz VA — — — — 3 AC operated 50/60 Hz W 3.4 3.4 3.4 3 DC operated W 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.
3.
3.10 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Safety Relays Safety Relay, continued Description Unit ESR5-NO-31-230VAC ESR5-NO-31-24V230 VAC-DC ESR5-NV3_ ESR5-VE3_ ESR5-NE-51_ Power Supply Circuit Actuating voltage 50/60 Hz Vac 230 24–230 — — 24 Actuating voltage—Us Vdc — 230 24 24 24 Voltage tolerance pick-up voltage xe 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 0.8–1.1 — Power consumption AC operated 50/60 Hz VA — — — — AC operated 50/60 Hz W 5.8 5.8 — — 2.
Control Relays and Timers easySafety 3.11 Contents easySafety Description Page easySafety Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.
Control Relays and Timers easySafety 3.11 Technical Data and Specifications 3 easySafety Relay Description Unit 3 ES4P_ General Standards 3 EN 55011, EN 55022, IEC/EN 61000-4, IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-27, EN 954-1: Category 4, EN ISO 13849-1: PL e, EN IEC 62061: SILCL 3, EN IEC 61508: SIL 3 Dimensions (W x H x D) mm Mounting 3 107.
3.11 3 Control Relays and Timers easySafety easySafety Relay, continued Description Unit ES4P_ 3 Power Supply V 24 Vdc (–15/+20%) 3 Permissible range Vdc 20.4 to 28.
Control Relays and Timers easySafety 3.
3.11 3 Dimensions 3 ESR5_ Control Relays and Timers easySafety Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 3 3 3 1.77 (45.0) 3.54 (90.0) 3.54 (90.0) 3 3 3 1.87 (47.5) 3 2.68 (68.0) 4.23 (107.5) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-204 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2015 www.eaton.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products 4.1 ELC Series PLCs ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . .
4.1 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Contents ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Description 4 Page ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection ELCB Brick Style PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELCM Modular Brick PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Modular PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.
4.
4.
4.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.
4.
4.
4.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.
4.
4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers ELC-AN04ANNN Analog Input and Output Modules (Right Side Bus) Analog input/output modules uses voltage or current mode for any channel—see table for resolution based on type and mode.
4.1 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Accessories Power Supplies 4 4 All ELC controllers, analog and specialty expansion modules operate from 24 Vdc. 4 4 ELC-PS01 4 4 These power supplies provide a convenient way to provide robust DC voltage for ELC and other products.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.1 Plate Mount Use the ELC-ACCOVER surface mount stand-alone modules instead of mounting to a DIN rail. This may be 4 used to mount analog, temperature or the RS-485 adapters remotely. 4 4 Plate Mount Description Catalog Number Plate mount for specialty modules, qty.
4.1 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Technical Data and Specifications Controllers Description ELC-PB14NNDR/DT ELC-PC12NNAR/DR/DT ELC-PH12NNDT ELC-PA10AADR/DT ELC-PV28NNDR/DT 4 Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25.2 x 90 x 60 37.4 x 90 x 60 37.4 x 90 x 60 37.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.1 Distributed I/O Adapter Modules ELC-CANET, refer to Volume 9—OEM, CA08100011E, Tab 3, section 3.2.
4.1 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Circuit Diagrams DC Input Sink Mode DC Input Source Mode 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 +24V 0V S/S X1 X2 Sink Mode DC Power Supply DC Transistor Sinking Output Trigger Circuit 4 4 X0 LED +24V 0V S/S X0 X1 X2 Source Mode DC Power Supply Relay Outputs Load Load Y0 Y0 <0.
4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 ELC-PV Controller 4 2.75 (70.0) 2.09 (53.2) ELC-PV28NNDR POWER RUN ERROR BAT. LOW 4.31 (109.4) IN S S OUT C0 X0 Y0 X1 Y1 X2 Y2 4 2.36 (60.0) 4 4 X3 RS-232 RS-495 IN 0.12 (3.0) OUT 3.98 (101.0) X4 C1 X5 Y3 X6 Y4 X7 Y5 S 4 Y6 X11 Y7 X12 Y10 4 3.54 (90.0) C2 S X10 4 X13 RUN X14 C3 X15 Y11 X16 Y12 X17 Y13 4 STOP 4 1 4 0 4 0.
4.1 4 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Right Side Specialty and Expansion Modules 0.12 (3.0) 2.36 (60.0) 0.99 (25.2) 4 4 4 4 3.54 (90.0) EXTENSION PORT 4 4 4 4 0.12 (3.0) 4 4 ELC-ACCOVER Plate Mount for Specialty Modules 0.12 (3.0) 4 4 4 4 4 4 3.94 (100.0) 3.54 (89.9) 4.20 (106.5) 4 4 4 4 0.27 (6.8) 0.12 (3.0) 2.51 (63.4) 4 0.28 (7.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 ELC-PS01 4 4 4 L 4 N 3.54 (90.0) 4 24V 0V 4 POWER 4 ELC-PS01 4 13.30 (0.5) 1.44 (36.5) 0.12 (3.0) 4 2.36 (60.0) 4 4 ELC-PS02 0.12 (3.0) 2.17 (55.0) 13.30 (0.5) 4 2.36 (60.0) 4 4 4 4 L 3.94 (100.0) N 3.54 (90.0) 4 24V 4 0V 4 POWER 4 ELC-PS02 4 0.12 (3.0) 1.28 (32.
4.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 ELC-HHP Hand-Held Programmer 4 4 4 2.64 (67.0) 3.54 (90.0) 4 1.14 (29.0) 4 M3 p0.5 4 Places 4 4 4 4 3.60 (91.5) 4 7.09 (180.0) 4 4 4 4 1.81 (46.0) 4 4 1.73 (44.0) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.
4.2 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Contents XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Description 4 Page XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.2 Product Selection Guide 4 XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4 4 4 4 XC121 Compact PLC XC101 Modular PLCs XC201 Modular PLCs XC202 Modular PLCs Page V7-T4-28 Page V7-T4-28 Page V7-T4-29 Page V7-T4-29 This PLC is particularly suitable for applications where space is at premium and with high communication requirements.
4.
4.2 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Product Identification 1 4 2 4 4 7 4 4 4 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 6 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 7 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 9 8 4 9 4 Item Number Description Item Number Description 1 XC121 Compact PLC CPU 6 Battery 2 XC121 I.
4.2 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Product Selection XC121 Compact PLC CPU 4 4 4 4 4 Can be locally expanded with I/O module XIO-EXT-121-1.
4.2 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers XC201 Modular PLCs Order backplane, terminals and battery accessories separately.
4.2 4 XIOC—Analog PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers XIOC Analog Modules Description Pkg. Qty.
4.2 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Accessories Terminals 4 Terminals One 18 pole terminal plug is required for each digital and analog module. 4 Pkg. Qty.
4.2 4 Battery 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Battery Description Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number Lithium 1/2 AA 3.6V battery for backup of real-time clock 1 256209 XT-CPU-BAT1 4 4 Programming Cables 4 Description Pkg. Qty.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.
4.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.2 XC121 Compact PLC, continued Description Unit 4 XC-CPU121-2C256K Interfaces Serial interface (RS-232) without handshake lines Baud rate 4 Programming (character format: 8 data bits, No parity, 1 stop bit) 19.2, 38.4 (default), 57.6 4 Connector type RJ45 Potential isolation No 4 0.3, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 115.
4.2 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers XC121 Expansion Module Description Unit XIO-EXT121-1 4 General 4 Ambient temperature °F (°C) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) Storage °F (°C) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) 4 4 4 4 4 4 Standards IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 Mounting position Horizontal Relative humidity, noncondensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % 10–95 Air pressure (in operation) hPa 795–1080 Vibration resistance Frequency 5–9 Hz; 3.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.2 XC121 Expansion Module, continued Description Unit 4 XIO-EXT121-1 Digital Outputs Number 4 At X3: 8 (can also be used as inputs) Rated voltage Rated voltage (Ue) Vdc 24 % <5 A 0.5 at 24 Vac Permissible range 4 4 20.4–28.
4.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.2 XC101 Modular PLCs, continued Description Unit XC-CPU101-C64K-8DI-6DO XC-CPU101-C128K-8DI-6DO XC-CPU101-FC128K-8DI-6DO XC-CPU101- C256K-8DI-6DO Interfaces Serial interface (RS-232) without handshake lines Baud rate 4 4 kbit/s Max. 57.6 Max. 57.6 Max. 57.6 4 Max. 57.
4.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.2 XC200 Series Modular PLCs, continued Description Unit XC-CPU201-EC256K-8DI-6DO(-XV) XC-CPU201-EC512K-8DI-6DO(-XV) XC-CPU202-EC4M-8DI-6DO-XV Interfaces 4 4 Ethernet Baud rate 10/100–Autodetect 10/100–Autodetect 10/100–Autodetect Connector type Mbit/s RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 Potential isolation No No No 4 4 Serial interface (RS-232) without handshake lines Baud rate Max. 115.2 Max. 115.2 Max. 115.
4.2 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers XIOC Digital Input Modules Description Unit XIOC-8DI XIOC-16DI XIOC-32DI 4 Modules DC input DC input DC input 4 Input voltage Vdc 24 24 24 Permissible range Vdc 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8 Input voltage Vac — — — Permissible range Vac — — — Normally 3.5 kohm Normally 5.9 kohm Normally 5.6 kohm 4 4 4 4 4 Input type Input resistance Input current mA Normally 6.9 Normally 4.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.
4.
4.
4.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.
4.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.2 Power Supply Suppression Filters Description Unit XT-FIL-1 XT-FIL-2 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 4 4 General Standards Ambient temperature °F (°C) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) Storage °F (°C) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) 4 Mounting position Vertical or horizontal Vertical or horizontal 4 Vibration resistance 10–57 Hz ± 0.
4.2 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4 Dimensions 4 XC-CPU101, XC-CPU201, XC-CPU202 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 4 4 3.94 (100.0) 4 4 4 4 3.94 (100.0) 2.36 (60.0) 4 4 XIOC_ 4 4 3.94 (100.0) 4 2.87 (73.0) 4 4 1.18 (30.0) 3.74 (95.0) 0.83 (21.0) 3.74 (95.0) 1.97 (50.0) 4 4 4 Backplates XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-XC XIOC-BP-3 XIOC-BP-EXT XIOC-BP-XC1 4 0.14 (3.5) 4 3.46 (88.0) 4 1.54 (39.0) 2.36 (60.0) 2.11 (53.5) 4 0.12 (3.0) 0.
4.2 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) XC-CPU-121_, XIO-EXT121-1 4 XT-RJ45-ETH-RS232 4 4 1.97 (50.0) 4 1.38 (35.0) 3.54 (90.0) 3.94 (100.0) 4 4 1.97 (50.0) 4 1.85 (47.0) 3.54 (90.0) 1.38 (35.0) 1.18 (30.0) 4 4 4 0.63 (16.0) 0.90 (22.8) 1.47 (37.3) 0.24 (6.0) 4 4 4 4 3.46 (88.0) 4 0.34 (8.5) 4 4 0.27 (6.8) 4 0.18 (4.
4.3 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers Contents XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers Description 4 Page XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.
4.3 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers Technical Data and Specifications XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers Description Unit XC-152-D6-11 XC-152-D8-11 XC-152-E3-11 XC-152-E6-11 XC-152-E8-11 RISC, 32 bit at 400 MHz RISC, 32 bit at 400 MHz RISC, 32 bit at 400 MHz RISC, 32 bit at 400 MHz RISC, 32 bit at 400 MHz Mbyte 64 64 64 64 64 NAND FLASH (can be used for data security) Mbyte Approx. 128 available Approx.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.3 Dimensions 4 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4 1.63 (41.5) Ø 0.18 (4.5) 4 4 4 4.77 (121.2) 4 4.34 (110.2) 4.16 (105.6) 4.04 (102.6) 4 4 4 4 0.06 (1.5) 5.15 (130.8) 4 1.99 (50.6) 4 6.11 (155.
4.4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XV Series HMI-PLCs Contents XV Series HMI-PLC Description 4 Page XV Series HMI-PLC Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 V7-T4-57 V7-T4-57 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Product Description Features The XV HMI-PLC is a powerful combination of logic and visualization based on the open CoDeSys programming platform.
4.4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XV Series HMI-PLCs Product Selection 4 XV HMI-PLC XV HMI-PLC Display Resolution CoDeSys Firmware 3.5 in TFT Resistive QVGA 320x240 5.7 in TFT Resistive VGA 640x480 7.
4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Contents XI/ON Series Remote I/O Description 4 XI/ON Series Remote I/O Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Product Selection Guide 4 XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4 4 4 4 4 XI/ON As many as needed, as few as possible— this is the principle on which the XI/ON modular I/O system was built. An extensive range of digital and analog I/Os as well as technology modules are available.
4.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.
4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O System Overview System Configuration 4 XN Module and Base Compatibility Chart XN-S4S-SBCS XN-S4T-SBCS XN-S4S-SBBS-CJ XN-S4T-SBBS-CJ XN-S6S-SBBSBB XN-S6T-SBBSBB XN-S6S-SBCSBC XN-S6T-SBCSBC XN-B3S-SBB XN-B3T-SBB XN-B3S-SBC XN-B3T-SBC XN-B4S-SBBC XN-B4T-SBBC XN-B6S-SBBSBB XN-B6T-SBBSBB XN-B6S-SBCSBC XN-B6T-SBCSBC XN-P3S-SBB XN-P3T-SBB XN-P3S-SBB-B XN-P3T.
4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Maximum System Configuration Plan your XI/ON station with the software “I/Oassistant”. Maximum 74 XI/ON Modules in Slice Design 4 4 Advantage 1: Automatically generates a full parts list for your order. Style Number: Catalog Number: 4 Advantage 2: Generates an error message as soon as the system limits are exceeded.
4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Maximum System Configuration, continued Plan your XI/ON station with the software “I/Oassistant”. Maximum 74 XI/ON Modules in Slice Design 4 Advantage 1: Automatically generates a full parts list for your order. 4 Advantage 2: Generates an error message as soon as the system limits are exceeded. 4 4 IMPORTANT: When extending your system, make sure that you have a sufficient number of bus refresh or power feed modules.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.
4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Product Selection XNE Series 4 4 The following are included as standard with all gateways: 2 x End bracket XN-WEW-32/2-SW, 1 x End plate XN-ABPL.
4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O XNE Digital Input XNE Digital Input Modules Positive switching. 4 Channels Rated Voltage via Power Supply Terminal Input Delay tRise/tFall Input Voltage High Signal Style Number Catalog Number 8 24 Vdc <100/<200 μs 11 V-UL 140035 XNE-8DI-24VDC-P 16 24 Vdc <150/<300 μs 11 V-UL 140040 XNE-16DI-24VDC-P 4 4 4 XNE Digital Output XNE Digital Output Modules Resistive inductive and lamp load connectable.
4.5 4 4 XI/ON Series Remote I/O XN Series The following are included as standard with all gateways: 2 x End bracket XN-WEW-32/2-SW, 1 x End plate XN-ABPL.
4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Slice Module XN Power Supply Modules Number of diagnostic bits: 4. Ripple <5% (to EN 61131-2). 4 Operating and Field Voltage System Power Supply Rated Current Consumption from Modbus 24 Vdc 24 Vdc — Maximum System Supply Current 1.
4.5 XI/ON Series Remote I/O XN Digital Output Modules Base module required. Resistive inductive and lamp load connectable. 4 4 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products Slice Module Channels Rated Voltage via Power Supply Terminal Switching Frequency with Resistive Utilization Load in Hz Factor g in % 2 24 Vdc <5000 (RLO <1 kohm) 100 <100 (RLO <1 kohm) 4 <5000 (RLO <1 kohm) 4 XN-S3T-SBC XN-S3S-SBC XN-S4T-SBCS XN-S4S-SBCS 140053 XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 140060 XN-2DO-24VDC-0.
4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Slice Module XN Temperature Modules Base module required. Rated voltage via power supply terminal: 24 Vdc. 4 Channels Connectable Sensors Measuring Range (°C) Value Representation For Use With … Style Number Catalog Number 2 PT100. 200.
4.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Spring-Cage Terminals, continued Description For Use With … 4 Style Number Catalog Number 4 Six Connection Levels Slice Module — XN-4DI-24VDC-P XN-4DI-24VDC-N 140082 XN-S6T-SBBSBB 4 Connection to C rail XN-4DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XN-4AI-U/I 140083 XN-S6T-SBCSBC 4 4 4 4 Block Module — XN-32DI-24VDC-P 140136 XN-B6T-SBBSBB Connection to C rail XN-32DO-24VDC-0.
4.
4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Accessories Coding Elements 4 Coding Elements 4 Description For Use With … Style Number Catalog Number Included as standard with every electronics module.
4.
4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O XNE Gateways Description Unit 4 XNE-GWBR-PBDP XNE-GWBR-CANOPEN XNE-GWBR-2ETH-IP Fieldbus PROFIBUS-DP CANopen Ethernet Protocol PROFIBUS-DPV0 and PROFIBUS-DPV1 CANopen EtherNet/IP Maximum number of stations 48 modules (XN, XNE) of slice design or max. length of station: 1m 62 modules (XN, XNE) of slice design or max. length of station: 1m 74 modules (XN, XNE) of slice design or max.
4.5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Supply Modules Description Unit Operating voltage XN-BR-24VDC-D XN-PF-24VDC-D XN-PF-120/230VAC-D 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 120/230 Vac System supply (USYS) Vdc 24 — — Permissible range, 24 Vdc (USYS) Vdc 18–30 1 — — Permissible range, 5 Vdc (UMB [built into system]) Vdc 4.7–5.3 — — Field voltage (UL) 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 120/230 Vac Permissible range (UL) 18–30 Vdc 18–30 Vdc 2 102–132 Vac (120 Vac) 195.
4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Digital Input Modules, continued Description Unit XN-16DI-24VDC-P XN-32DI-24VDC-P XNE-8DI-24VDC-P XNE-16DI-24VDC-P Channels Number 16 32 8 16 Rated voltage at supply terminal (UL) Vdc 24 24 24 24 Rated current drawn from supply terminal (IL) 12 mA <40 <30 <1.5 <3 Rated current drawn from module bus (IMB) 2 mA <45 <30 <15 <15 Insulation test (Ui) Vac 500 500 500 500 Heat dissipation W 2.5 4.2 <1.5 <2.
4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Digital Output Modules Description Unit XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-N XN-2DO-120/230VAC-0.5A XN-2DO-24VDC-2A-P XN-4DO-24VDC-0.
4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Digital Output Modules, continued Description Unit XN-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XN-32DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XNE-8DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XNE-16DO-24VDC-0.
4.
4.
4.5 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Analog Input Modules, continued Description Unit Temperature measurement, continued Value representation XN-4AI-U/I XN-2AI-THERMO-PI — XN-2AI-PT/NI-2/3 XNE-8AI-U/I-4PT/NI Standard, 16-bit/12-bit left-aligned 4 The following can be connected: 4 Measuring current (Imess) — — <1 mA <0.5 mA Destruction limit (Umax.) Vdc — — >30 >30 4 Basic error limit at 23°C % — <0.2 (type T, –200 to 0°C: 0.6%) <0.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.
4.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Technology Modules Description Unit Rated voltage at supply terminal (UL) Vdc 24 24 mA <50 1 <20 Rated current drawn from module bus (IMB) mA <40 <50 Heat dissipation W <1.3 <3 Output voltage UL (–0.8V) Output current <0.5A, short-circuit proof Output voltage UL, GNDL Output current 0.
4.5 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Technology Modules, continued Description Unit XN-1CNT-24VDC XNE-2CNT-2PWM PWM Module Channels — 2 PWM — 0.01Hz–20 kHz Period duration/duty cycle — 32-bit at 41.6 ns/bit Pulse duration — 32-bit at 41.6 ns/bit 4 Pause time — 32-bit at 41.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.
4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Digital Input Modules XN-S3…-SBB for XN-2DI-24VDC-P XN-S4…-SBBC for XN-2DI-24VDC-P XN-S3…-SBB for XN-2DI-24VDC-N XN-S4…-SBBC for XN-2DI-24VDC-N XN-S3…-SBB for XN-2DI-120/230VAC XN-S4…-SBBC for XN-2DI-120/230VAC 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-90 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O XN-S4…-SBBS for XN-4DI-24VDC-P 4.5 XN-S6…-SBBSBB for XN-4DI-24VDC-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XN-S4…-SBBS for XN-4DI-24VDC-N XN-S6…-SBBSBB for XN-4DI-24VDC-N 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XN-B3…-SBB for XN-16DI-24VDC-P XN-B4…-SBBC for XN-16DI-24VDC-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.
4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O XN-B6…-SBBSBB for XN-32DI-24VDC-P XNE-8DI-24VDC-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 24V 4 4 4 4 XNE-16DI-24VDC-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 24V 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-92 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Digital Output Modules XN-S3…-SBC for XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-P and XN-2DO-24VDC-2A-P 4 XN-S4…-SBCS for XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-P and XN-2DO-24VDC-2A-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XN-S3…-SBC for XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-N 4 XN-S4…-SBCS for XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-N 4 4 4 4 4 4 XN-S3…-SBC for XN-2DO-120/230VAC-0.5A 4 XN-S4…-SBCS for XN-2DO-120/230VAC-0.5A 4 4 4 4 4 4 XN-S4…-SBCS for XN-4DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 4 XN-B3…-SBC for XN-16DO-24VDC-0.
4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O XN-S6…-SBCSBC for XN-4DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XNE-8DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 GND 4 24V 4 4 XN-B6…-SBCSBC for XN-32DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XNE-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 GND 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-94 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.
4.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Analog Output Modules XN-S3…-SSB for XN-1AO-I(0/4…20MA) 4 XN-S3…-SBB for XN-2AO-I(0/4…20MA) 4 4 4 Channel 1 4 Channel 2 4 XN-S3…-SBB for XN-2AO-U(-10/0…+10VDC) 4 XNE-4AO-U/I U 4 I 4 4 Channel 1 4 Channel 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.
4.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O XN-S4x…-SBCS Supply via C-rail and Common Potential Link for XN-2DO-R-NO Power Relais 1 Feeding 4.5 4 Module Circuit XN-S4x…SBCS for XN-2DO-R-NO Relais n 4 4 4 4 4 4 24V 4 24V 4 XN-S4x…-SBBS for XN-2DO-R-CO 4 Module Circuit XN-S4x…-SBBS for XN-2DO-R-CO 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Load Limit Curve 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 Supply via C-rail. 2 Maximum eight relay modules. 3 Top-hat rail. 4 Cross-link via QVR in the base module. 5 Electronics module.
4.
4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Dimensions 4 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) XN Gateways XN-GWBR-PBDP XN-GWBR-CANOPEN XN-GWBR-DNET XN-GWBR-MODBUS-TCP XN-PLC-CANOPEN 1.99 (50.6) XNE Gateways 4 XNE-GWBR-PBDP XNE-GWBR-CANOPEN XNE-GWBR-2ETH-IP 4 4 2.93 (74.4) 4 4 2.95 (75.0) 4 4.52 (114.8) 4.46 (113.3) 3.35 (85.0) 5.08 (129.0) 3.54 (90.0) 4 1.32 (33.5) 4 4 4 Note: The plugs/connectors used depends on the version.
4.5 4 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) XN Electronics Modules in Slice Design XN-BR-24VDC-D XN-PF-24VDC-D XN-PF-120/230VAC-D 4 4 4 4 4 4 0.50 (12.6) XN-2DI-24VDC-P XN-2DI-24VDC-N XN-2DI-120/230VAC XN-4DI-24VDC-P XN-4DI-24VDC-N XN-2DO-24VDC-2A-P XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-N XN-2DO-120/230VAC-0.5A XN-4DO-24VDC-0.
PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 Base Modules in Slice Design 4 Spring-Cage Terminals 3 Connection Levels XN-S3T-SBB XN-S3T-SBC XN-P3T-SBB XN-P3T-SBB-B 0.69 (17.6) 4 Connection Levels XN-S4T-SBBC XN-S4T-SBBS XN-S4T-SBBS-CJ XN-S4T-SBCS XN-P4T-SBBC XN-P4T-SBBC-B 1.96 (49.9) 6 Connection Levels XN-S6T-SBBSBB XN-S6T-SBCSBC 4 4 4 1.96 (49.9) 4 1.96 (49.9) 4 4 0.95 (24.1) 3.54 (90.0) 0.95 (24.1) 4.63 (117.6) 0.95 (24.
4.5 4 4 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Base Modules in Block Design Spring-Cage Terminals 3 Connection Levels XN-B3T-SBB XN-B3T-SBC 4 Connection Levels XN-B4T-SBBC 3.97 (100.8) 1.96 (49.9) 0.69 (17.6) 4 6 Connection Levels XN-B6T-SBBSBB XN-B6T-SBCSBC 1.96 (49.9) 1.96 (49.9) 4 4 4 0.95 (24.1) 3.54 (90.0) 0.95 (24.1) 4.63 (117.6) 4 5.07 (128.9) 3.54 (90.0) 4 0.95 (24.1) 3.54 (90.0) 6.08 (154.5) 4 4 1.64 (41.6) 4 1.
Operator Interface Products 5.1 ELC Graphics Panel Product Overview Product and Software Selection Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 HMi Operator Interface XV Operator Interface 5.4 V7-T5-5 V7-T5-5 V7-T5-6 V7-T5-7 V7-T5-7 V7-T5-8 V7-T5-10 V7-T5-11 HMi Operator Interface Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 5 5 Operator Interface Products Product Overview Product and Software Selection Guides Operator Interfaces and Programming Software Selection Guide 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Description ELC-GP Graphics Panel HMi Operator Interface Page V7-T5-5 Page V7-T5-13 Screen size Two-line and four-line 4.3-inch, 5.7-inch, 7.0-inch, 8.0-inch and 10.
5.1 Operator Interface Products Product Overview Software Product Selection Guide 5 5 5 5 Description Visual Designer XSoft-CoDeSys-3 1 Galileo HMiSoft ELCSoftGP Overview Feature-rich software package with SCADA functionality and Web serving capabilities that can be run on XV, XP, ePro PS operator interfaces or personal computers Feature-rich software package with integrated logic and visualization that can be run on specific XV operator interface models Intuitive visualization tool.
5.
Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panels 5.2 Contents ELC Graphics Panels Description Page ELC Graphics Panels Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.
Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panels 5.
5.2 5 5 5 5 Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panels Software and Accessories ELCSoftGP Programming Software System Requirements ● Operating Systems—Windows 2000, Windows XP ELCSoftGP Programming Software configures all ELC graphic panels. With ELCSoftGP, applications can be created, edited, downloaded and uploaded. Move programs from one controller to a different one with ease.
Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panels 5.2 Power Supplies 5 All ELC modules operate from 24 Vdc. These power supplies provide a convenient way to provide robust DC voltage.
5.2 Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panels 5 Technical Data and Specifications 5 ELC Graphics Panels 5 Environmental 5 5 Description Specification Transportation and storage Temperature –4 to 140 °F (–20 to 60 °C) Operating Temperature 32 to 122 °F (0 to 50 °C) 5 Humidity 20–90% RH (noncondensing) Communication interface COM1: RS-232; COM2: RS-485/RS-422 5 Vibration 0.
Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panels 5.2 Dimensions 5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 5 ELC-GP04 5 ALARM RS-232 RS-485 5 5 Up Pg Up 3.82 (97.0) Left 5 Pg Dn Down Esc Shift 3.35 (85.0) Right 5 F0 F2 F1 F5 F6 F3 F7 F4 F8 F9 5 Enter 5 5.79 (147.0) 5 5 1.20 (30.5) 0.14 1.40 (3.5) (35.5) 5 5 Cut-Out Dimensions 5.31 (135.0) 5 5 5 5 3.35 (85.0) 5 5 5 5.31 ~ 5.37 (135 ~ 136.
5.2 5 Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panels Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) ELC-GP02 5 5 ALARM RS-232 RS-485 5 5 3.82 (97.0) 5 3.35 (85.0) F0 Esc 5 F1 F2 F3 F4 0 1 2 3 F6 F7 F8 F9 Up Pg Up 4 Left F5 5 6 7 8 9 Enter Right Pg Dn Down 5 5.79 (147.0) 5 5 5 1.20 (30.5) 0.14 1.40 (3.5) (35.5) 5 5 Cut-Out Dimensions 5.31 (135.0) 5 5 5 3.35 (85.0) 5 5 5 5 5 5.31 ~ 5.37 (135 ~ 136.5) ELC-GPXFERMOD 5 2.00 (50.9) 5 5 0.78 (19.8) 5 5 0.39 (10.
Operator Interface Products HMi Operator Interface 5.3 Contents HMi Operator Interface Description Page HMi Operator Interface Features Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.
Operator Interface Products HMi Operator Interface 5.3 Catalog Number Selection 5 HMi Operator Interface 5 HMi 5 HMIVU 07 CU NB E 5 Series HMIVU = HMi VU Series Display 04 = 4.3-inch LCD 06 = 5.6-inch LCD 07 = 7.0-inch LCD 08 = 8.0-inch LCD 10W = 10.
5.3 5 5 5 5 5 HMiSoft Programming Software For use with the of HMi and HMi VU series touchscreens. This easy to use Windows based software can run on Windows XP and Windows 7 32-bit and 64-bit systems.
Operator Interface Products HMi Operator Interface 5.3 Adapter Plate Description Catalog Number 6-inch HMi adapter plate for PM1000 APPM1HMI6 5 5 5 Kits Description Catalog Number HMi spare parts kits (includes several power connectors, battery doors, gaskets, mounting clips, etc.
5.3 Operator Interface Products HMi Operator Interface 5 Technical Data and Specifications 5 HMi VU Operator Interface 5 Description 5 5 5 5 5 LCD module Display type 5 HMIVU06CUNB1 5.6-inch TFT LCD 7-inch TFT LCD 8-inch TFT LCD 10.
5.3 Operator Interface Products HMi Operator Interface Dimensions 5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 5 HMIVU04 4.88 (124.0) 3.87 (98.3) 0.52 (13.1) 0.83 (21.2) 0.28 0.41 (7.0) (10.4) 0.79 (20.0) 2.11 (53.7) 5 1.43 (36.3) 5 5 Cutout 2.21 (56.1) 5 2.82 (71.7) 5 5 0.39 (10.0) 5 5 0.83 (21.0) 5 HMIVU06 0.063 (1.6) to 0.24 (6.0) 6.79 (172.4) 5 7.24 (184.0) 5 5 5.21 (132.4) 5.67 (144.0) 5 5 5 5 5 HMIVU07 0.063 (1.6) to 0.24 (6.0) 5 6.79 (172.4) 7.24 (184.0) 5 5 5.67 (144.
5.3 5 5 Operator Interface Products HMi Operator Interface Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) HMIVU08 0.063 (1.6) to 0.24 (6.0) 8.64 (219.4) 5 8.94 (227.1) 5 5 5 6.56 (166.5) 6.85 (174.1) 5 5 5 5 HMIVU10 5 0.063 (1.6) to 0.24 (6.0) 10.29 (261.3) 10.71 (272.0) 5 5 5 7.88 (200.0) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V7-T5-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—June 2015 www.eaton.com 7.45 (189.
Operator Interface Products XP and XV Operator Interface 5.4 Contents XP Operator Interface Description Page XP-503 with Visual Designer Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . XV with Visual Designer, Galileo, or XSoft-CoDeSys-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 5 5 Operator Interface Products XP and XV Operator Interface Catalog Number Selection XP Operator Interface XP 5 XP – 503 10 A10 A00 1V 5 Family XP = Windows Embedded Standard 7 Panel PC 5 Development License 1V = Win7 Embedded Std., Visual Designer runtime bundle 5 Performance Class 503 = Multi-touch, metal housing, glass screen 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Display Size 10 = 10.1-inch widescreen 15 = 15.6-inch widescreen 21 = 21.5-inch widescreen Processor and Memory A10 = 1.
Operator Interface Products XP and XV Operator Interface 5.4 Technical Data and Specifications 5 XP Operator Interface 5 5 5 Model 10.1-inch XP-503-10-A10-A00-1V 15.6-inch XP-503-15-A10-A00-1V 21.5-inch XP-503-21-A10-A00-1V Screen diagonal 10.1-inch widescreen 15.6-inch widescreen 21.
5.4 5 Operator Interface Products XP and XV Operator Interface Contents XV Operator Interface Description 5 Page XP-503 with Visual Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV with Visual Designer, Galileo or XSoft-CoDeSys-3 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Interface Products XP and XV Operator Interface 5.4 Selecting the right model for your application The XV product offered with Visual Designer, Galileo or XSoft-CoDeSys offers the highest level of flexibility for one operator interface product. Galileo provides a visualization environment designed around the needs of machine building OEMs. Use Galileo when designing high-performance machines in the OEM space. Visual Designer provides a fully integrated SCADA and HMI platform.
5.4 5 Operator Interface Products XP and XV Operator Interface Product Selection Guide XP and XV Operator Interface with Visual Designer 5 5 5 Series XP Model XP-503 XV-102 XV-152 10.1, 15.6, 21.5 3.5, 5.7, 7.0 5.7, 8.4, 10.4 Housing material Powder-coated aluminum Plastic Metal Operating system Windows Embedded Standard 7 Screen Size 5 Touchscreen technology 5 Development software Communication ports XV WinCE 5.
Operator Interface Products XP and XV Operator Interface 5.4 XV Series with Galileo Only Runtime Option (Not Available on XP Series) Series XV Model Model XV-102-H Screen Size 5 5 3.5, 5.7, 7.0 Housing material Plastic Operating system WinCE 5.
5.
Operator Interface Products XP and XV Operator Interface 5.4 XV Operator Interface with XSoft-CoDeSys, HMI-PLC Description Catalog Number XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, RS-485 XV-102-B6-35TQRC-10 XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, RS-485 XV-102-B8-35TQRC-10 XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, SmartWire-DT XV-102-BE-35TQRC-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, RS-232, RS-485 XV-102-D6-57TVRC-10 XV 5.
5.4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Operator Interface Products XP and XV Operator Interface Technical Data and Specifications XV Operator Interface Series XV Midrange Operator Interface Model XV-102 Screen Size 3.5-Inch XV-152 5.7-Inch Operating system 7.0-Inch 5.7-Inch 8.4-Inch WinCE 5.0 Professional/Standard 10.4-Inch WinCE 5.
Operator Interface Products XP and XV Operator Interface 5.4 Contents Visual Designer Software Description Page XP-503 with Visual Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV with Visual Designer, Galileo, or XSoft-CoDeSys-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Designer Software Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Galileo Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XSoft-CoDeSys-3 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Operator Interface Products XP and XV Operator Interface Fully connected, Web-enabled Today’s operator interface applications range from basic monitor and control to high-end, featurerich HMI software with Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA). Customers demand communications capability with any network, PLC, Web client, and database. The answer: Eaton’s Web-enabled Visual Designer operator interface software.
Operator Interface Products XP and XV Operator Interface Visual Designer 5.
5.4 5 Operator Interface Products XP and XV Operator Interface Contents Galileo Software Description 5 Page XP-503 with Visual Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV with Visual Designer, Galileo, or XSoft-CoDeSys-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Designer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Galileo Software XSoft-CoDeSys-3 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Interface Products XP and XV Operator Interface 5.4 Contents XSoft-CoDeSys-3 Software Description Page XP-503 with Visual Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV with Visual Designer, Galileo, or XSoft-CoDeSys-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Designer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Galileo Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supplies Power Supply 6.1 General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 6 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Contents Power Supplies Description 6 Page General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.1 Contents PSG Series Description Page PSG Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Power Derating Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensor Power Supply . . . .
6.
6.
6.1 6 6 6 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies PSG Series, continued Single-Phase PSG15E12SP 6 6 6 PSG60E12SM PSG100E12SM PSG60E PSG60E24SP PSG60E24RM >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C <0°C to –20°C derate >50°C derate power by 1% / °C, power by 2.5% / °C >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >70°C derate power by 4% / °C General/Physical Data, continued Power derating— vertical mounting >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >70°C derate power by 4% / °C >50°C derate power by 2.
6.
6.1 6 6 6 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies PSG Series, continued Single-Phase, continued PSG60N24RP PSG120E PSG120E24RM PSG240E PSG240E24RM PSG480E PSG480E24RM General/Physical Data, continued Power derating— vertical mounting >50°C derate power >50°C derate power >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, by 2.5% / °C by 2.5% / °C >70°C derate power by 4% / °C Power derating— horizontal mounting >50°C derate power N/A by 2.5% / °C N/A N/A N/A 6 >50°C derate power N/A by 2.
6.
6.1 6 6 6 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies PSG Series, continued Three-Phase, continued PSG60F24RM 6 6 6 6 PSG960F24RM >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >70°C derate power by 5% / °C >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >70°C derate power by 5% / °C >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >70°C derate power by 5% / °C >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >70°C derate power by 5% / °C >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C Power derating— horizontal mounting >45°C derate power by 2.
Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.1 PSG Series, continued 6 Redundancy Modules PSG480R24RM PSG960R24RM 6 Nominal voltage 24–48 Vdc 24–48 Vdc 6 DC input range 22–60 Vdc 22–60 Vdc Nominal current <20A <40A Inrush current limitation <25A <50A 6 Nominal output voltage Vin–0.65V (typ.) Vin–0.65V (typ.) 6 Nominal current <20A <40A Efficiency >97% typ. >97% typ. 6 Input/ground 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac 6 Output/ground 1.5k Vac 1.
6.1 6 6 6 6 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies PSG Series, continued Buffer Module PSG480B24RM Input Nominal voltage 24 Vdc DC input range 22.8–28.8 Vdc Maximum voltage 35 Vdc Current Charging mode: <0.6A 6 Power (standby mode) 2.5W average Maximum signal (inhibit) 35V / 10 mA 6 Max inrush current < 20A Charging time < 30s 6 Output 6 Discharging mode: 20A max. Nominal voltage 24 Vdc typ.
6.
6.
6.
6.1 6 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in mm 6 Note: Dimensions are for reference only. 6 PSG15E12SP 6 32.0 ±0.5 (C) PSG60E12SM 10.6 90.0 ±0.5 120.5 ±0.5 32.0 ±0.5 106.4 ±0.5 Catalog Number: PSG60E12SM 24V 2.5A 6 CAUTION HOT SURFACE 6 6 Adjust DC OK 100.0 ±0.5 6 SPEC LABEL 121.0 ±0.5 3.3 6 6 100-240V~1.5A 50-60Hz 6 5.0 ±0.2 6 6 PSG30E12SP 32.0 ±0.5 PSG100E12SM 10.6 7.1 ±0.5 90.0 ±0.5 6 111.6 ±0.5 50.0 ±0.5 98.0 ±0.
6.1 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Approximate Dimensions in mm 6 Note: Dimensions are for reference only. PSG60E 6 PSG60E24RM 105.2 ±0.5 32.0 ±0.3 Catalog Number: PSG60E 24V 2.5A 6 125.0 ±1.0 106.6 ±0.5 120.5 ±0.5 32.0 ±0.5 6 5.5 ±0.2 6 CAUTION HOT SURFACE 6 Adjust DC OK SPEC LABEL 121.0 ±0.5 6 121.0 ±0.4 6 Spec Label 6 100-240V~1.5A 50-60Hz 6 5.0 ±0.2 6 PSG60E24SP 6 PSG60N24RP 32.0 ±0.6 10.0 ±0.3 0.8 ±0.4 32.0 ±0.6 113.0 ±0.6 6 16.4 ±0.5 0.
6.1 6 6 6 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Approximate Dimensions in mm Note: Dimensions are for reference only. PSG120E PSG240E 50.0 ±0.2 118.5 ±0.5 DC 24V 5A 105.2 ±0.5 6 6 Adjust DC OK CAUTION HOT SURFACE 121.0 ±0.2 6 24V Catalog Number: PSG240E SPEC LABEL AC 100-240V 2A 50-60 Hz 6 13.0 100-240V~5A 50-60Hz 4.0 115.0 ±0.6 5.5 6 6 PSG120E24RM PSG240E24RM 5.5 ±0.2 124.1 ±1.0 116.6 ±1.0 85.0 ±0.5 105.2 ±0.5 98.0 ±0.5 50.0 ±0.5 6 121.0 ±0.
Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.1 Approximate Dimensions in mm 6 Note: Dimensions are for reference only. PSG480E 6 PSG60F24RM 7.1 160.0 ±0.5 6 117.3 ±0.5 50.0 ±0.5 6 24V 6.6 ±0.1 Catalog Number: PSG480E N L 2.5A 97.5 ±0.5 Adjust DC OK Catalog Number: PSG60F24RM 6.6 ±0.35 121.0 ±0.5 6 6 Three-Phase 400–500V ~0.3A 50–60 Hz Adjust 6 DC OK 100-240V~ 24V 7A 50-60Hz 6 20A 121.0 ±0.5 96.6 ±0.5 86.8 ±0.5 5.0 111.4 ±0.5 6 110.2 ±0.
6.1 6 6 Note: Dimensions are for reference only. PSG240F24RM PSG960F24RM + + 24V – 6.6 ±0.35 117.3 ±0.5 70.0 ±0.5 6 6 General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Approximate Dimensions in mm 6 6 Power Supplies – 117.3 ±0.5 255.0 ±0.5 24V 5A 97.5 ±0.5 Adjust DC OK Catalog Number: PSG240F24RM SPEC LABEL 121.0 ±0.5 6.6 ±0.5 40A 121.0 ±0.5 SPEC LABEL Catalog Number: PSG960F24RM Adjust DC OK Three-Phase 400–500V ~1.7A 50–60 Hz + 6 + 6 – – 88.1 ±0.5 106.0 ±0.5 110.2 ±0.5 111.
6.1 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Approximate Dimensions in mm 6 Note: Dimensions are for reference only. PSG960R24RM 6 PSG480B24RM 115.0 ±1.0 70.0 ±0.5 50.0 ±0.5 1.2 24V 40A Vin1 OK 20A Catalog Number: PSG480B24RM Vin1 Vin2 Com 22V–60V 6 5.5 ±0.5 98.0 ±0.5 121.0 ±0.5 6 +0.5 –0.3 Status 121.0 ±0.5 35.5 ±0.5 SPEC LABEL Vin2 OK 7.1 ±0.5 SPEC LABEL Vout 6 6 1.6 Catalog Number: PSG960R24RM 6 OK 5.0 96.6 ±0.8 113.0 ±1.0 6 6 6 20A Max.
6.1 6 Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Contents ELC Series Description 6 PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Series Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.
6.1 Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6 Dimensions 6 ELC-PS01 Power Supply Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 6 6 6 6 L N 3.54 (90.0) 6 24V 0V 6 POWER 6 ELC-PS01 6 6 13.3 (0.52) 1.44 (36.5) 0.12 (3.0) 2.36 (60.0) 6 ELC-PS02 Power Supply 6 2.17 (55.0) 6 6 13.3 (0.52) 2.36 (60.0) 0.12 (3.0) 6 L 6 6 6 N 3.94 (100.0) 3.54 (90.0) 0V POWER 6 ELC-PS02 6 6 24V 0.12 (3.0) 1.28 (32.
Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.1 Contents easyRelay Power Supply Description Page PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supply Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 6 Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Product Selection 6 easyRelay Power Supply Units Rated input voltage 100–240 Vac, single-phase. 6 Input Voltage Range Rated Output Voltage Output Voltage Setting Range Rated Output Power Rated Output Current Catalog Number EASY200-POW 100–240 Vac 24 Vdc/12 Vdc — 8W 0.35A / 20 mA EASY200-POW EASY400-POW 100–240 Vac 24 Vdc — 30W 1.25A EASY400-POW EASY500-POW 100–240 Vac 24 Vdc — 60W 2.
Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.1 Technical Data and Specifications 6 easyRelay Series 6 EASY200-POW 8W EASY400-POW 30W EASY500-POW 60W EASY600-POW 100W Nominal voltage 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac Voltage range 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac Frequency 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz Nominal output voltage 24 Vdc ± 3% 24 Vdc ± 3% 24 Vdc ± 3% 24 Vdc ± 3% Nominal current 0.35A 1.25A 2.5A 4.
6.1 Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6 Dimensions 6 EASY200-POW, EASY400-POW and EASY500-POW Series Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 6 EASY400-POW EASY500-POW EASY200-POW 0.30 (7.5) 6 0.42 (10.8) 1.97 (50.0) 6 6 3.54 (90.0) 3.54 (90.0) 6 4.02 (102.0) 4.02 (102.0) 1.77 (45.0) 6 4.33 (110.0) 4.33 (110.0) 6 6 6 0.18 (4.5) 6 1.87 (47.5) .157 DIA. (3.9) 2.22 (56.5) 6 6 (M4) 0.30 (7.5) (M4) 1.41 (35.8) .157 DIA. (3.9) 2.81 (71.5) 1.40 (35.
Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.1 Contents Sensor Power Supply Description Page PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensor Power Supply Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.
Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.1 Wiring Diagram 6 Sensor Power Supply Slug V+ Output Com 6 Slug V+ Output Com 6 Junction Box PS256A-01B1 only 6 Sinking Slug Sourcing Slug Power Monitor 15-132 VAC/ 15-132 VDC Chassis internally connected to AC GND Slug In L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 GND 6 AC Input Power 6 Not Used 6 6 6 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 6 Sensor Power Supply 4.6 (117) 6 4.6 (117) 6 6 6 9.0 (229) 8.2 (208) 6 9.7 (246) 6 3.
Industrial Control Transformers Types MTE and MTK 7.1 Transformers Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type MTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type MTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE Marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Contents Industrial Control Transformers Description 7 Page Transformers Type MTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type MTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE Marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Industrial Control Transformers Transformers 7.
7.1 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Contents Type MTE Transformer Description 7 Page Type MTE Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type MTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE Marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Product Selection Additional Product Selection information is available in Volume 2, CA08100003E. 7 Type MTE 7 Primary: 240 x 480, 230 x 460, 220 x 440 with Jumpers Secondary: 120/115/110 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 25 1 1.7 (0.8) C0025E2A 2 50 1 2.6 (1.2) C0050E2A 2 75 1 3.5 (1.6) C0075E2A 2 100 1 4.2 (1.9) C0100E2A 2 150 1 6.7 (3.0) C0150E2A 200 1 8.5 (3.
7.1 7 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Primary: 240 x 480 with Jumpers Secondary: 120 x 240 with Jumpers, Secondary Fuse Clips Not Applicable Primary: 550/575/600 Secondary: 22/23/24 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 12 2.5 (1.1) C0050E4W 2 75 12 3.5 (1.6) C0075E4W 2 100 12 4.0 (1.8) C0100E4W 2 150 12 6.5 (3.0) C0150E4W 200 12 8.2 (3.7) C0200E4W 250 12 10.0 (4.5) C0250E4W C0250E2CXX 300 12 11.0 (5.
7.1 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Primary: 200/220/440, 208/230/460, 240/480 Secondary: 23/110, 24/115, 25/120 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 7 3.4 (1.5) C0050E5E 2 75 7 4.8 (2.2) C0075E5E 2 100 7 5.9 (2.7) C0100E5E 2 150 7 7.9 (3.6) C0150E5E 200 7 10.6 (4.8) C0200E5E 250 7 13.9 (6.3) C0250E5E 300 7 15.5 (7.0) C0300E5E 350 7 16.8 (7.6) C0350E5E 500 7 23.4 (10.
7.1 7 7 Transformers Primary: 120 x 240 with Jumpers and Two-Pole Primary Fuse Block for Rejection-Type Fuses Secondary: 24 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA 7 Industrial Control Transformers Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number Primary: 380/400/415 with Two-Pole Primary Fuse Block for Rejection-Type Fuses Secondary: 22/23/24 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 3 2.8 (1.3) C0050E1BFB 2 50 13 2.6 (1.
7.1 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Primary: 380/400/415 with Two-Pole Primary Fuse Block for Rejection-Type Fuses Secondary: 110 x 220 with Jumpers; Fuse Clips Not Available VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 6 3.2 (1.5) C0050E4DFB 2 75 6 4.2 (1.9) C0075E4DFB 2 100 6 5.4 (2.5) C0100E4DFB 2 150 6 7.2 (3.3) C0150E4DFB 200 6 8.9 (4.0) C0200E4DFB 250 6 10.4 (4.7) C0250E4DFB 300 6 11.2 (5.1) C0300E4DFB 350 6 13.2 (6.0) C0350E4DFB 500 6 20.
7.1 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Primary Fuse Kit The primary fuse kit includes a two-pole class CC fuse block, instructions, and all associated mounting and wiring hardware. Fuses are not included. When installed, the primary fuse kit will add a maximum of 11/16 inch to the transformer depth and 1-15/16 inches to the transformer height.
Industrial Control Transformers Transformers 7.1 Wiring Diagrams Diagram 1 7 Diagram 5 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Diagram 2 Diagram 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Diagram 3 7 Diagram 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Diagram 4 Diagram 8 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2015 www.eaton.
7.
Industrial Control Transformers Transformers 7.1 Contents Type MTK Transformer Description Page Type MTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type MTK Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE Marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 7 7 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Product Selection Additional Product Selection information is available in Volume 2, CA08100003E. Type MTK Primary: 240 x 480, 230 x 460, 220 x 440 Secondary: 120/115/110 7 Primary: 380/400/415 Secondary: 110 x 220 VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 500 1 13.0 (5.9) C0500K2A 750 1 19.5 (8.9) C0750K2A 1000 1 29.8 (13.6) C1000K2A 7 1500 1 30.0 (13.6) C1500K2A 2000 1 38.0 (17.3) C2000K2A 7 3000 1 53.0 (24.
Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Technical Data and Specifications Wiring Diagrams Insulation System and Temperature Rise Industry standards classify insulation systems and rise as shown below: Diagram 1 Insulation System Classification Ambient + Winding Rise + Hot Spot = Temp.
7.1 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Diagram 5 Diagram 9 Diagram 6 Diagram 10 Diagram 7 Diagram 11 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 240 V 480 V H1 H3 H2 H4 H1 H3 H2 H4 7 7 7 H1 H3 H2 H4 X4 X2 X3 X1 7 7 7 X4 X2 X3 X1 X4 X2 X3 X1 120 V 240 V Diagram 8 7 7 Diagram 12 7 H1 7 600 V 575 V 550 V H2 7 7 7 7 X2 24 V 23 V 22 V X1 7 V7-T7-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2015 www.eaton.
Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Diagram 15 7 H4 H5 H6 7 0V H3 208 V H2 575 V H1 230 V H2 420 V 400 V 380 V 400 V H1 460 V Diagram 13 7.
7.1 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Contents Type MTE CE-Marked CPT Description 7 Page Type MTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type MTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE Marked Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Product Selection Additional Product Selection information is available in Volume 2, CA08100003E. 7 Type MTE CE Marked IP00 7 Primary: 240 x 480, 230 x 460, 220 x 440 with Jumpers Secondary: 120/115/110 7 Primary: 550/575/600 Secondary: 110/115/1204 7 VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 1 3.5 (1.6) CE0050E2ACE 2 50 10 3.5 (1.6) CE0050E4CCE 2 75 10 4.8 (2.
7.1 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Type MTK CE Marked with Factory Mounted Finger-Safe Terminal Covers IP20 7 Primary: 240 x 480, 230 x 460, 220 x 440 with Jumpers Secondary: 120/115/110 7 VA Terminal Type Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 250 A 1 8.8 (4.0) CE0250K2ACEFS 300 A 1 11.0 (5.0) 7 Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number CE0300K2ACEFS 250 B 14 14.3 (6.5) CE0250K2UCEFS CE0350K2ACEFS 300 B 14 15.8 (7.
7.1 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Protection Index IP00 When terminal covers are installed on primary and secondary, and fuse block covers are used, the protection index is IP20. Overload Capability Short-term overload is designed into transformers as required by ANSI.
7.1 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Wiring Diagrams Diagram 1 Diagram 5 Diagram 2 Diagram 6 Diagram 3 Diagram 7 Diagram 4 Diagram 8 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 V7-T7-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2015 www.eaton.
7.
7.1 7 7 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Acceptable Rating of Primary Overcurrent Protection for CE Marked Control Transformers 1 Regulation Data Chart Fuses 13/32 x 1-1/2 Inches (10 x 38 mm) Timelag (IEC 269) Inrush VA at 20% Power Factor Sec. Voltage 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 500 115 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 750 Transformer VA Rating NEMA/IEC 95% Sec. Voltage NEMA/IEC 90% Sec. Voltage NEMA/IEC 85% Sec. Voltage 20.
Industrial Control Transformers Transformers 7.1 Contents Type AP Transformer Description Type MTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type MTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE Marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type AP Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Catalog Number Selection Please refer to Page V7-T7-3. Product Selection Additional Product Selection information is available in Volume 2, CA08100003E. 240/480 Volts to 120/240 Volts, 60 Hz kVA Mounting Wiring Diagram 1 Frame Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 3 Bottom FR133 5 65 (29.5) C0003P7GB 5 Bottom FR99 5 104 (47.2) C0005P7GB 7.5 Bottom FR100 5 129 (58.6) C0007P7GB 10 Bottom FR101 5 148 (67.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders 8.1 Screw Connection IEC—XB Series IEC—XB Series Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screw Connection Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring Cage Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pluggable Spring Cage Connection Terminal Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDC Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents IEC—XB Series Description 8 Page IEC—XB Series Screw Connection Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . Spring Cage Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pluggable Spring Cage Connection Terminal Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDC Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miniature Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XB Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Technical Data and Specifications 8 IEC—XB Series Description Specification Insulation material Polyamide 6.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Screw Connection Description 8 Page Screw Connection Terminal Blocks Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Contents Single Level—Through-Feed Description Single Level—Through-Feed Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 8 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Product Selection XBUT4 8 Screw Connection Single Level—Through-Feed Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.
8.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series XBUT with Reducing Bridge XBACPU25D12 XBACUT10 8 8 lmax lmax 8 8 XBARBUT10ST XBARBUT10 8 8 Central Input One-Sided Input 8 XBUT10 XBUT25 8 XBPU25D12 8 8 Step-Down Bridge with Standard Feed-Through Terminal Blocks Input Pick-Off 8 Terminal Blocks Cross-Section Terminal Blocks Cross-Section AWG (mm2) One-Sided Input Imax 8 XBUT10 6 AWG (10 mm2) XBUT25 12 (2.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Technical Data and Specifications 8 Screw Connection Single Level—Through-Feed Description 8 XBUT25 XBUT4 XBUT6 XBUT10 XBUT16 XBUT35 Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 32/4 41/6 57/10 76/16 101/25 150/50 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/II III/I III/I III/I III/I III/I 0.25–2.5/0.25–2.5 0.25–4/0.25–4 0.25–6/0.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Single Level—Ground Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . .
8.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Double Level Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Triple Level Sensor/Actuator Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series XB3UKA25PE 8.1 Screw Connection Triple Level Sensor/Actuator Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size 8 Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 250/26/24–12 300/15/30–14 Gray 50 XB3UKA25PE 8 Gray 50 XB3UKA25PEL24 8 8 Screw Connection Triple Level 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 Screw Connection Triple Level with Red LED, 15–30 Vdc, 2.5–7.5A 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Screw Connection Triple Level Sensor/Actuator 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Description XB3UKA25 XB3UKF25 XB3UKA25PE XB3UKF25PE Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 26/2.5 30/4 26/2.5 26/2.5 8 Maximum cross section with insertion bridge solid/stranded in mm2 4/2.5 4/2.5 4/2.5 4/2.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Fuse Terminal Blocks Description Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 8 XBUT6FBN Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Screw Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks for 6.3 x 32 mm (1/4 in x 1–1/4 in) Fuse Terminal Width 8 Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-3 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 1/10/24–8 400/10/24–8 Black 50 XBUT6FBN 400/10/24–8 Black 50 XBUT6FBNL24 400/10/24–8 Black 50 XBUT6FBNL60 400/10/24–8 Black 50 XBUT6FBNL250 Fuse Terminal Blocks 8 8.
8.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Description 8 Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.
8.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents High Current Blocks Description Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . .
8.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Mini Screw Connection Terminal Blocks Description Page Single Level—Through-Feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Contents Spring Cage Connection Description Page Spring Cage Terminal Blocks Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Single Level—Through-Feed Description 8 Single Level—Through-Feed Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Product Selection XBPT6 8 Spring Cage Connection Single Level—Through-Feed Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 800/31/28–12 550/25/21/24–12 600/20/26–12 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 800/40/28–10 550/34/30/24–10 600/30/20–10 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 800/52/24–8 550/45/36/20–8 600/50/20–8 10.
8.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 XBPT with Reducing Bridge 8 XBPT6 8 XBACPT6 lmax 8 lmax 8 8 8 XBARBST6 8 8 Central Input One-Sided Input XBPT25 XBPT25 8 XBACPT25 8 Step-Down Bridge with Standard Feed-Through Terminal Blocks Input Pick-Off Terminal Blocks Cross-Section Terminal Blocks Cross-Section AWG (mm2) XBPT6 8 AWG (6 mm2) XBPT25 12 (2.5) XBPT4 10 (4) XBQT15 14 (1.5) XBQT25 12 (2.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Spring Cage Connection Single Level—Through-Feed 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 31/4 40/6 52/10 65/16 90/25 125/35 8 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I III/I III/I III/I 0.25–4 0.25–6 0.25–10 0.25–16 2.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Contents Single Level—Ground Blocks Description Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks Description Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . .
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Spring Cage Connection Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks, Four-Wire XBPT25D22 Terminal Width 8 Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 800/28/28–12 550/24/21/24–12 600/20/26–12 Color Standard Pack Catalog Number Spring Cage Multi-Conductor 8 5.2 mm 8 6.2 mm 8 12 AWG/2.
8.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Double Level Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . .
8.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Triple Level Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Fuse Terminal Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series XBPT4FBN Spring Cage Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks, for 6.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Overload and Short-Circuit Protection 8 8 Terminal Blocks Overload Protection Short-Circuit Protection Only U (V) Individual Interconnected Individual Interconnected Imax. (A) XBPT4FBN 400 1.6W 1.6W 4W 2.5W 10.0 XBPT4FBE 250 1.6W 1.6W 4W 2.5W 6.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Description Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Hybrid Terminal Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Mini Spring Cage Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . .
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Pluggable Spring Cage Terminal Blocks Description 8 Page Pluggable Spring Cage Terminal Blocks Connection Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Connection Terminal Blocks Description Page Connection Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Pluggable Spring Cage Connection Terminal Blocks—Without Plug 8 Catalog Number Length Cover Length Height for— Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in XBPT25P 0.20 (5.2) 1.91 (48.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) XBPT25PD12 0.20 (5.2) 2.38 (60.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) 8 8 8 XBPT25P 8 1.99 (50.5) 8 8 8 2.42 (61.5) 8 8 8 8 8 XBPT25PD12 2.42 (61.5) 8 8 8 8 2.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Connection Plugs Description 8 Page Connection Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Plugs Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Spring Cage Connection Plugs, Double, Bridgeable XBAPSPDB25_ 8 Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Number of Positions Standard Pack Catalog Number 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Connection Receptacles Description 8 Page Connection Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Receptacles Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Accessories 8 Pluggable Spring Connection Receptacles Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBAPSC25_ Catalog Number 2.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Connection Accessories Product Description 8 8 8 8 The pluggable XBPT series features an extensive range of application-oriented accessories. Strain reliefs are available for the plugs and the plug housing as an option and hooks onto the terminal block housing when the plug is snapped on. Product Selection 8 Pluggable Spring Cage Connection Accessories 8 8 can be snapped on at the required points as an option.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Contents IDC Terminal Blocks Description Page IDC Terminal Blocks Single Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Single Level Description 8 Page Single Level Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Multi-Conductor Description 8 Page Single Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series IDC—Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks, Three-Wire Ground Blocks XBQT15D12PE 8 Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 —/—/24–16 —/—/24–16 —/—/24–16 Green/Yellow 50 XBQT15D12PE 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 IDC—Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC 8 8 8 8 8 Description XBQT15D12 XBQT25D12 XBQT15D12PE XBQT25D12PE XBQT15D22 XBQT15D22PE Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 17.5/1.5 24/2.5 — — 17.5/1.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Double Level Description Page Single Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Fuse Terminal Blocks Description Page Single Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Accessories 8 IDC—Fuse Terminal Blocks Standard Pack XBQT25FBE Catalog Number XBACQT25D12 Description Color Number of Positions 8 End cover Gray — 10 Partition plate — — 10 XBATQTD12 8 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 10 XBAFBS26 3 10 XBAFBS36 5 10 XBAFBS56 10 10 XBAFBS106 XBATSPAI4 8 8 8 Test adapter — — 10 8 2.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Description Page Single Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Hybrid Terminal Blocks Description Page Single Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Technical Data and Specifications 8 Screw Connection Single Level—Through-Feed Description XBQU15 XBQU25 XBQU15PE XBQU25PE XBQU15D12 XBQU25D12 Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 17.5/1.5 24/2.5 — — 17.5/1.5 24/2.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Miniature Circuit Breakers Description 8 Miniature Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Miniature Circuit Breakers Overview 8 Product Description 8 8 8 8 8 8 The new XB Series thermal miniature circuit breaker offers convenient overload protection.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Contents Circuit Breakers Description Circuit Breakers Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Time/Current Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Time/Current Curve 8 Total Switch-Off Period for Nominal Current, 73.4°F (23°C) 0.25A - 4A 6A- 10A 8 Temperature Factor 1000 Response Time in Seconds 8 Note: When mounted in rows, the nominal current of the devices can only be transmitted at 80% or must be correspondingly over-dimensioned. 10,000 100 Ambient Temperature Temperature Factor –4°F (–20°C) 0.76 14°F (–10°C) 0.84 32°F (0°C) 0.91 73.4°F (23°C) 1.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks Description 8 Page Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks Description 8 XBUK6FSI XBUK6FSIL_ Fuse type ISO C C Maximum current with single arrangement in A 30 30 8 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 4/3 4/3 8 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I 8 Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–4 0.25–4 8 Stranded with ferrule without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–6 0.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Blocks Description 8 Page Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks Description 8 XBPT4FSI XBPT4FSIL_ Fuse type ISO C C Maximum current with single arrangement in A 30 30 8 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 6/3 6/3 8 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I 8 Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–4 0.25–4 8 Stranded with ferrule without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–4 0.
8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents XB Series Accessories Description 8 Page XB Series Accessories End Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIN Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angled Mounting Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferrules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marking Accessories . . . . . . . . .
8.
8.1 8 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series DIN Rails Product Selection 8 8 Perforated and unperforated DIN rails in accordance with E 60715. 35 x 7.5 mm x 2m 15 x 5.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Angled Mounting Brackets 8 Product Selection The angled brackets enable the DIN rail to be mounted with a spacing or at an angle of 30°. Features ● ● ● ● For mounting DIN rail at 30° angle For use with M6 screw Chromated steel Provides better visibility 8 Angled Mounting Bracket Standard Pack 8 Catalog Number Height Inches (mm) 1.39 (35.4) 8 10 8 XBANBGS Height Inches (mm) 1.
8.1 8 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Ferrules Product Selection 8 Ferrules are offered in two basic designs—an insulated style available in models for wire sizes 20 through 4 AWG and a non-insulated type available in models for wire sizes 22 through 6 AWG. 8 Insulated 8 8 8 8 ● ● Note: UL Ratings do not typically pertain to the use of Ferrules— Ferrules are covered under DIN VDE 0611.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Ferrules with Insulating Collar 8 8 L1 L2 S1 8 D1 D2 8 S2 8 Catalog Number Approximate Dimensions D1 D2 L1 L2 S1 S2 XBAF1 0.04 (1.1) 0.10 (2.5) 0.55 (14.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.010 (0.25) XBAF3 0.05 (1.3) 0.11 (2.8) 0.55 (14.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.010 (0.25) XBAF4 0.06 (1.5) 0.12 (3.0) 0.55 (14.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.012 (0.30) XBAF6 0.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Twin Ferrules L1 8 L2 8 D2 D1 8 8 8 S1 S2 Catalog Number Approximate Dimensions D1 D2 L1 L2 S1 S2 XBAFT1 0.06 (1.5) 0.10 (2.5) 0.59 (15.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.010 (0.25) XBAFT3 0.07 (1.8) 0.11 (2.8) 0.59 (15.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.010 (0.25) XBAFT4 0.08 (2.1) 0.13 (3.4) 0.59 (15.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.012 (0.30) XBAFT6 0.09 (2.3) 0.14 (3.6) 0.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Hand Tools 8 Stripping Tools Product Selection Stripping Tools 8 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 XBTCUTSTP Stripping Tools Technical Data and Specifications Conductor/Cable Stripping Range Description Specification Conductor/cable 0.2–6 mm2/24–10 AWG Wire cutter 6 mm2/10 AWG 8 Length Stripping Length Weight In lbs (g) 8.07 (205) Up to 18 mm 0.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Printed Marking Tag Options 8 Horizontally Printed Marking Tags and Marking Directions 8 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 6 5 4 3 2 8 2 Marking Direction: Horizontal 1 8 1 9 8 8 Marking Accessories 7 8 Marking Direction: Vertical 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Marking Tags for 5.2 mm Wide Terminal Blocks Marking Tags for 6.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Marking Tags for 8.2 mm Wide Terminal Blocks Marking Tags for 12 mm Wide Terminal Blocks Standard Pack Standard Pack Number Sequence Catalog Number Number Sequence 8.
8.1 8 8 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Pre-Printed Marking Tags Terminal Blocks Marking Tags The tags are made of white self-extinguishing polyamide 6.6 and the imprint is hot stamped with rubproof black ink. ● 8 8 8 8 White marking strip available preprinted. Strip covers 10 terminals. Marking 1–10, 11–20, up to 991–999. Contact Eaton for more options. ● XBMZB5 or XBMZBF5 for terminal blocks 5.2 mm wide ● ● ● XBMZB6 or XBMZBF6 for terminal blocks 6.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Marker Strips and Sheets (for use with XBAPLT2006K1 plotter) The XB Series marking system provides logical and clear identification of the modular terminal blocks and interface modules. 8 8 Product Selection XBMZB_ 8 Marker Sheets (Strip of 10) Marker Strips (Strip of 10) Terminal Width Standard Pack XBMPZB_ Blank Strips 5.2 mm Terminal Width) Catalog Number 10 Standard Pack Catalog Number Marker Sheets (10 rows of 12) 5.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Terminal Block Group Marking Terminal block groups are marked using marking labels that are snapped into the marker strip groove of the terminal blocks. The group is marked using either labels or insert markers. Insert Markers for Laser Printers One sheet = 56 labels. Lettering field is 40 x 17 mm.
8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Marking Plotter The automatic Prepare Pen function ensures optimum marking results right from the first character. 8 Pens can remain in the pen station even for prolonged intervals without drying out. 8 8 Custom Marking Tag System This plotter system uses Windows®-based software to interface with a PC, allowing custom printing on standard terminal blocks marking tags.
8.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Testing Accessories Separating Plates, Covers and Bridges Test Adapter For 4 mm diameter test plug and 4 mm diameter safety test plug. Makes contact in the bridge shaft. Product Selection Test Adapter XBATSPAI4 Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 XBATSPAI4 Modular Test Plugs For individual assembly of test plug strips. Product Selection Modular Test Plugs XBATS_ 8.
8.2 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA Contents NEMA Description 8 NEMA C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted . . TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 NEMA Overview 8 Product Description Standards and Certifications NEMA terminal blocks provide a panel or DIN rail mount block that can be assembled from modular pieces. These blocks accommodate wire from 22 to 1/0 AWG and up to 175A and 600V.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA 8.2 Contents C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted Description Page C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 8 8 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA Product Selection When Ordering Specify Catalog number and quantity, which must be in a multiple of the available minimum standard package. 8 Examples: 200 Cat. No. C381ST ● 20 Cat. No. C381PT ● 100 Cat. No. C381CC ● 8 Control, Power, Switch and Fuse Blocks 1 8 Description 8 AWG Wire Size Catalog number and quantity of end sections also in minimum quantity standard package. Standard Pack 2 Catalog Number Example: 25 Cat. No.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA 8.2 Accessories 8 C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted 1 Description Standard Pack 2 Catalog Number Aluminum mounting channel—6 ft (1.8m) lengths 25 C381MC Screw type channel clamp (one required each end) 3 100 C381VC Spring type channel clamp (one required each end) 3 100 C381CC Vinyl marking strip—3/8 in x 25 ft (9.5 mm x 7.6m) coil 1 C381MS Marking paper—pressure sensitive—5/16 x 11-11/16 in (7.9 x 296.
8.2 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA Technical Data and Specifications 8 Formulas for Calculating Blocks and Channel Lengths N = Number of Blocks 8 C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted 8 Description Blocks Length Control blocks and pull apart blocks 0.762 + (0.375 x N) 8 Power circuit blocks 0.812 + (0.750 x N) Fuse and switch blocks 0.812 + (0.755 x N) 8 Mounting channel (minimum channel length) 0.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA 8.2 Contents TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular Description Page C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted . . . . . TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA 8.2 Accessories 8 TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular 8 Number of Poles Carton Quantity 2 Catalog Number 12.5 (317.5) — 25 TMR12 37.5 (952.5) — 25 TMR37 72.0 (1828.8) — 25 TBATR72 1m — 20 MC382MA1-20 Miniature blocks—TBDV4 and TBBT4 6.0 (152.4) — 50 TMS6 TBU Series—matte finish 7.5 (190.5) — 25 TMSU All other blocks 12.5 (317.
8.2 8 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA Technical Data and Specifications TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular Description Specification 8 Continuous temperature 212°F (100°C) Tensile strength 10,000–12,000 psi 8 Impact resistance 2.
8.2 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular 8 1.09 (27.7) 0.88 (22.4) 1.88 (47.8) 0.63 (16) 1.23 (31.2) 8 0.63 (16) 0.17 – 0.28 (4.3 – 7.1) Clearance for #8 Screw TBDSM12 3 Holes 0.09 (2.3) Dia. 0.33 (8.4) Deep 0.67 0.59 (17) (15) 1.23 (31.2) 0.59 (15) 1.48 (37.6) 1.71 (43.4) 1 (25.4) 1.25 (31.8) 1.25 (31.8) 8 TBBT4 8 1.88 (47.8) 1/4-28 Screw 8 1.19 (30.2) 1.75 (44.
8.3 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution Contents Power Distribution Products Description 8 Page Power Distribution CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks . . . . CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks . . . . . . Power Terminal Block Accessories . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks, Enclosed and Open 8.3 Contents Description Page CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . Power Terminal Block Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution 8.3 Power Terminal Block Short-Circuit Ratings (SCCR) for UL 508A Applications with Circuit Breakers Opening per Pole 8 Line Conductors Cu Load Conductors Cu SCCR @ 480V (Load Side) Eaton Breaker Available Breaker Current Ratings 8 175 2/0–#8 #4–#10 #12 #14 18 kA 18 kA 14 kA EGB125 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 8 16.00 x 16.00 x 6.75 (406.4 x 406.4 x 171.
8.3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Line Conductors Cu Load Conductors Cu SCCR at 480V (Load Side) Eaton Breaker Available Breaker Current Ratings 310 350 kmil–#4 #4–#6 #8 #10 25 kA 25 kA 14 kA JGE250 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 310 350 kmil–#4 #4–#6 #8 #10 35 kA 35 kA 14 kA JGS250 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.
8.3 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) CHDB2203 8 CHDB3713 4.25 (108.0) 2.13 (54.1) 11 12 11 6.30 (160.0) 3.70 (94.0) 12 11 8 8 12 8 2.88 (73.2) 5.50 (139.7) 21 22 21 22 21 8 8 22 8 8 CHDB204F CHDB3213 5.19 (131.8) 3.32 (84.3) 8 Load Side 1.03 (26.2) Line Side 8 2.92 (74.2) 4.00 (101.6) 8 8 3.73 (94.7) 8 8 8 CHDB3233 3.70 (94.0) 6.30 (160.0) 8 2.15 (54.6) 8 8 1.40 (35.6) 5.50 (139.
8.3 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) CHDB330F CHDB377F 8 8 Load Side 1.54 Line (39.1) Side 8 8 3.82 (97.0) 8 4.66 (118.4) Load Side 1.86 (47.2) 3.82 (97.0) 4.66 (118.4) 8 8 8 8 2.87 (72.9) 2.93 (74.4) 8 8 8 1.40 (35.6) 4.49 (114.0) 8 1.40 (35.6) 4.49 (114.0) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-122 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution 8.3 Contents CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks Description CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks . . . . . . . CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Terminal Block Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
8.3 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution Technical Data and Specifications 8 CH160 Power Terminal Blocks Description 8 Specification Ratings To 840A, 600V Materials Molded material; black, UL rated 94V-0 thermoplastic Operating temperature 302°F (150°C) 8 8 Note: For optional cover, see Power Terminal Block Accessories, Page V7-T8-126.
8.3 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution Contents Power Terminal Block Accessories Description 8 CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks . . . . . . . CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . Power Terminal Block Accessories Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution 8.3 Technical Data and Specifications 8 TB Series Power Blocks Description 8 Specification Ratings 285A, 600V; UL/CSA Materials Molded material; black, UL rated 94V-2 thermoplastic Operating temperature 257°F (125°C) 8 8 8 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) CH163 Series Cover 8 Supplied with (4) #4 Thread-Cutting Screws Assembled as Shown 8 8 8 8 4.14 (105.2) 8 8 CHCPDB-1 = 2.1 (53.3) CHCPDB-2 = 3.72 (94.
8.4 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Contents Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Description 8 Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders C383 Series Disconnect Fuse Holders . . . . . . . C350 Series Fuse Blocks and W Series Fuse Holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Overview 8 Product Description Application Description Standards and Certifications Available in compact finger safe (C383) and an open (C350) design.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders 8.4 Contents C383 Series Fuse Holders Description Page C383 Series Disconnect Fuse Holders Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C350 Series Fuse Blocks and W Series Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders C350 Series Fuse Blocks and W Series Fuse Holders 8.4 Contents Description Page C383 Series Disconnect Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . C350 Series Fuse Blocks and W Series Fuse Holders Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Product Selection Class CC Fuse Blocks 8 8 8 Type Catalog Number Three-pole 1 C350BD3C61 Single-pole C350B1C61 DIN adapter C350KD 8 8 Class R, Three-Pole Fuse Holder 8 Fuse Holders—250V 30A Wire Termination 60A Number of Poles Carton Qty. Catalog Number Carton Qty.
8.
Connectivity Solutions 9.1 SmartWire-DT SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution System Overview System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overview Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gateway Modules and System Controllers Gateway Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Contents Description 9 Page System Overview System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overview Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Contents System Components Description Page System Overview System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overview Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 9 V7-T9-2 V7-T9-5 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 System Components 9 Product Description The start of the SmartWire-DT system is usually a gateway module connected to a PLC or controller fieldbus.
9.1 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution In-Panel Components On-Machine Components Digital and Analog I/O Modules Digital and analog I/O modules are connected as nodes on the SmartWire-DT network and allow standard or generic devices to be connected to the SmartWire-DT system. They can be connected anywhere along the flat cable network and can therefore be positioned in the control panel to help reduce I/O wiring.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.
9.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Contents Gateway Modules and System Controllers Description Gateway Modules and System Controllers Gateway Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV Series HMI-PLC with SmartWire-DT . . . . . XC152 Series PLC with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution System Controllers XV Series HMI-PLC with SmartWire-DT XC152 Series PLC with SmartWire-DT Product Description The XV HMI-PLC controller with SmartWire-DT master is a powerful combination of logic, visualization and connectivity to motor control devices.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.
9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Product Selection 9 Gateway Modules Gateway modules connect the SmartWire-DT system to the programmable logic controller (PLC). They are connected as nodes to the existing PLC fieldbus and are the start of the SmartWire-DT connection system.
9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution XV HMI/PLC XV HMI/PLC with SmartWire-DT 9 XV HMI/PLC with SmartWire-DT Display Size/Type Display Resolution 9 Programming Software Fieldbus Type RS-485 (DB9) Ethernet (RJ45) SmartWire-DT Catalog Number 9 Plastic Housing 3.5 in TFT QVGA 320x240 XSoft CoDeSys-2 or -3 None None Yes Yes XV-102-BE-35TQRC-10 5.
9.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution I/O and Powerfeed Modules, System Connectivity Components 9.1 Contents Description I/O and Powerfeed Modules, System Connectivity Components Powerfeed Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Connectivity Components . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 9 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Product Selection Powerfeed Modules Powerfeed Module 9 9 9 Powerfeed Modules Powerfeed modules feed auxiliary 24 Vdc power and/or 15 Vdc network power into the SmartWire-DT flat cable. The auxiliary 24 Vdc power is needed for the power supply of contactors and the 15 Vdc network power is used for supplying power to additional SmartWire-DT nodes.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 System Connectivity Components 9 System connectivity components for the SmartWire-DT system includes cables, connectors, jumpers, bushings, plugs, sockets, flat to round cable adapters, and crimping tools. 9 In-Cabinet Components Description Length Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number 328.
9.1 SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution In-Cabinet Components, continued 9 9 Connectivity Solutions Description Coupling 9 9 9 9 Catalog Number 1 SWD4-8SFF2-5 1 SWD4-RC8-10 Coupling For connecting or joining flat cables with flat plugs 9 Pkg. Qty.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Contents Motor Control Modules Description Motor Control Modules Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contactor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft Start Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Speed Starters/ Variable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.
9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Contactor Modules 9 Product Selection 9 Contactor Modules 123 SmartWire-DT module for attachment to XTCE007–XTCE032 contactors and XTRE control relays. One module is required per contactor. Contactor Modules PKE Contactor Module 9 Description Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number Two digital inputs for voltage-free contacts. One electrical interlock for the surface mounting of reversing combinations.
9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Electronic Motor Starters Product Selection 9 EMS-DO-… 9 9 Electronic Motor Starters—Complete Devices Electronic Motor Starters with SmartWire-DT built in do not require a separate module for connection to the SmartWire-DT network. Connection is made directly to the SmartWire-DT flat cable. 9 Max.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Soft Start Controllers 9 Product Selection DS7-… 4 to 12 A 16 to 32 A 41 to 100 A 135 to 200 A 9 Soft Start Controllers DS7 Series Soft Start Controllers with SmartWire-DT built in do not require a separate module for connection to the SmartWire-DT network. Connection is made directly to the SmartWire-DT flat cable. Soft starters for three-phase loads. Mains supply voltage (50/60 Hz). ULN 200–480 Vac.
9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Variable Speed Starters/Variable Frequency Drives Product Selection 9 DE1 9 9 Rated Operational Current Variable Frequency Drives Ie A 9 9 Assigned Motor P kW P hp Radio Interference Suppression Filter Frame Size Degree of Protection Catalog Number FS1 IP20/NEMA 0 DE1-121D4FN-N20N Ue, 230 Vac, Single-phase /U2, 230 Vac, Three-phase. Mains Voltage (50/60 Hz). ULN 200 (–10%) to 240 (+10%) V.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Variable Speed Starters—DC1, DA1 DC1/DA1 Variable Frequency Drives utilize a simple plug-in module for connection to the SmartWire-DT network.
9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Contents Pilot Device Modules Description 9 Pilot Device Modules Product Selection M22 Contact Modules, without LEDs . . . . M22 Contact Modules, with LEDs . . . . . . . M22 LED Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Pilot Device Modules 9 Product Description Features Pilot device modules fit onto standard M22 pilot devices in both front mount and base mount configurations.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Product Selection 9 M22 Pilot Device Modules Connections 9 M22 Contact Modules, without LEDs Number of Changeover Contacts Contact Sequence Contact Travel Diagram Stroke in Connection with Front Element 9 Configuration Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number 9 20 M22-SWD-K11 9 Front Mount M22-SWD-K11 1 1 0 1.2 2.8 4 3 6 2 5 9 5.5 9 M22-SWD-K22 2 1 0 1.2 2.8 4 3 6 2 10 9 M22-SWD-K22 5 9 5.
9.1 SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution M22 Contact Modules, with LEDs 9 Number of Changeover Contacts 9 9 Connectivity Solutions Contact Sequence Contact Travel Diagram Stroke in Connection with Front Element Configuration Color LED Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number 20 M22-SWD-K11LED-W Front Mount M22-SWD-K11LED_ 1 1 9 0 1.2 2.8 4 3 6 2 5 M22-SWD-K11LED-B 5.5 9 M22-SWD-K11LED-G 9 M22-SWD-K11LED-R 9 M22-SWD-K22LED_ 2 1 0 1.2 9 2.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Contents Stacklight Modules with SmartWire-DT Description Page Stacklight Modules with SmartWire-DT SL7 Series Stacklight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SL4 Series Stacklight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Stacklight Modules Product Selection 9 9 SL4-FMS_ SL7 and SL4—SmartWire-DT Versions for Control Cabinet Mounting SL7 and SL4 Series Stacklights with SmartWire-DT built in connect directly to the SmartWire-DT flat cable. 9 Description 9 Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system) Blade terminal SWD4-8MF2 Max. 0.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Contents On-Machine Components Description On-Machine Components Machine Mount I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Splitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Mount Powerfeed Modules . . . . . . . . Panel Transition Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SmartWire-DT Round Bus Cables . . . . . . . . . . Other System Components . .
9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Product Selection Machine Mount I/O Modules SmartWire-DT I/O modules for connection to most digital input and output devices.
9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Other I/O Connections For connection to I/O devices with and without built-in M12 connections. Description SWD4-PR_ SWD4-1LR5-S V-M20 Package Quantity Catalog Number 1 SWD4-PRM5-1-S 9 9 Enclosure and Remote Device M12 Receptacles M12 5-pin male receptacle, 1/2 inch NPT back threads, 3.2 ft (1 m) wiring leads For use with Eaton SL4/SL7 Series Stacklights with post-mount bases.
9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Panel Transition Components 9 Package Quantity Catalog Number 1 SWD4-SFL8-12 1 SWD4-SML8-12 1 SWD4-SML5-12 Package Quantity Catalog Number 6 in (0.1 m) length 1 SWD4-M1LR5-2S 1 ft (0.3 m) length 1 SWD4-M3LR5-2S 9 2 ft (0.6 m) length 1 SWD4-M6LR5-2S 3.2 ft (1 m) length 1 SWD4-1LR5-2S 9 4.9 ft (1.5 m) length 1 SWD4-1M5LR5-2S 6.5 ft (2 m) length 1 SWD4-2LR5-2S 9.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.
9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Contents Enclosed (IP67) Pilot Devices Description 9 Enclosed (IP67) Pilot Devices Enclosed M22 Pilot Device Examples . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M12 Wiring Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Product Selection 9 M22 operators and indicating lights including momentary and maintained pushbuttons, pilot lights, hand and key operated selector switches, and mushroom switches. 9 Enclosed M22 Pilot Device Examples 9 9 9 9 Pushbutton Double Pushbutton Selector Switch Key Selector Switch Palm Switch 9 M22-I_ SWD4-PRM5-… 9 Enclosures Sealed mounting enclosures for M22 devices.
9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Contents Remote Machine Mount Stacklights Description 9 Remote Machine Mount Stacklights Stacklight Mounting Modules— Fast Mounting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stacklight Mounting Modules— Post Mounting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.
9.
9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Gateway Modules, continued Description Unit EU5C-SWDEIP-MODTCP Gateway EU5C-SWDPROFINET Gateway EU5C-SWD-DP Gateway EU5C-SWDETHERCAT Gateway EU5C-SWD-CAN Gateway EU5C-SWDPOWERLINK Gateway Supply Voltage UPow Supply voltage V Input voltage ripple % Siemens MPI, (optional) Rated current (I) A Overload proof 24 Vdc (–15%/+20%) 24 Vdc (–15%/+20%) <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.
9.1 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Powerfeed Modules Description Unit Standards 9 Dimensions (W x H x D) in (mm) Weight lbs (kg) 9 9 9 EU5C-SWD-PF2-1 Powerfeed IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 1.38 x 3.54 x 4.88 (35 x 90 x 124) 1.38 x 3.54 x 4.88 (35 x 90 x 124) General 9 9 EU5C-SWD-PF1-1 Powerfeed 0.24 (0.11) 0.37 (0.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Powerfeed Modules, continued Description Unit EU5C-SWD-PF1-1 Powerfeed 9 EU5C-SWD-PF2-1 Powerfeed 9 Supply Voltage UPow Supply voltage V 24 Vdc (–15%/+20%) 24 Vdc (–15%/+20%) Input voltage ripple % <5 <5 — Yes A 0.7 0.7 Yes Yes Inrush current and duration A 12.5 A/6 ms 12.5 A/6 ms Heat dissipation at 24 Vdc W 3.8 3.
9.1 9 9 9 9 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution XV-102 Series HMI-PLCs and XC-152 Series PLCs Model XV-102 Screen Size 3.5 in 5.7 in 7.0 in 5.7 in XC-152 8.4 in Operating system WinCE 5.0 Professional WinCE 5.0 Professional WinCE 5.0 Professional WinCE 5.0 Professional WinCE 5.0 Professional WinCE 5.
9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Digital I/O Modules Description Unit EU5E-SWD-8DX EU5E-SWD-4DX EU5E-SWD-4D4D EU5E-SWD-4D2R EU5E-SWD-X8D IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 General Standards 9 9 9 Dimensions (W x H x D) in (mm) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.97 (35 x 90 x 101) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.97 (35 x 90 x 101) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.97 (35 x 90 x 101) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.
9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Digital I/O Modules, continued Description Unit EU5E-SWD-8DX EU5E-SWD-4DX EU5E-SWD-4D4D EU5E-SWD-4D2R EU5E-SWD-X8D 9 Connection Supply and I/O Push in terminals Push in terminals Push in terminals Push in terminals Push in terminals 9 Solid mm2 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) Flexible with ferrule 1 mm2 0.25–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.25–1.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Analog I/O Modules Description Unit EU5E-SWD-4AX EU5E-SWD-2A2A EU5E-SWD-4PT EU5E-SWD-4PT-2 9 IEC/EN 61131-2/EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2/EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2/EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2/EN 50178 9 General Standards Dimensions (W x H x D) in (mm) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.97 (35 x 90 x 101) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.97 (35 x 90 x 101) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.97 (35 x 90 x 101) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.97 (35 x 90 x 101) Weight lbs (kg) 0.22 (0.10) 0.
9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Analog I/O Modules, continued EU5E-SWD-4AX EU5E-SWD-2A2A EU5E-SWD-4PT EU5E-SWD-4PT-2 Four (two-wire connection, screened, length <10m) Two (two-wire connection, screened, length <10m) — — Voltage, current Voltage, current — — Adjustable Adjustable — — V 0–10 0–10 — — k ohms 13.3 13.
9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Accessories Description Unit SWD4-RC8-10 Resistor SWD4-8SF2-5 Plug SWD4-8SFF2-5 Coupling 9 SWD4-SF8-20 Bushing 9 General Standards 9 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 Dimensions (W x H x D) in (mm) 1.91 x 1.36 x 0.34 (48.5 x 34.5 x 10) 0.59 x 1.44 x 0.69 (15 x 36.5 x 17.5) 1.91 x 1.36 x 0.34 (48.5 x 34.5 x 10) 0.94 x 1.02 x 6.
9.1 9 9 9 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Accessories, continued Description Unit SWD4-SM8-20 Bushing SWD4-8FRF-10 Adapter SWD4-SFL8-20 Adapter SWD4-SML8-20 Adapter IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 0.94 x 1.02 x 6.69 (24 x 26 x 170) 1.38 x 3.54 x 1.38 (35 x 90 x 35) 1.38 x 3.27 x 1.57 (35 x 83 x 40) 1.38 x 3.27 x 1.
9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Machine Mount I/O Modules Description Unit 9 EU1E-SWD-2DX EU1E-SWD-2DD EU2E-SWD-4DX EU2E-SWD-4DD IEC/EN 61131-2, EN50178, IEC/EN 60529 IEC/EN 61131-2, EN50178, IEC/EN 60529 IEC/EN 61131-2, EN50178, IEC/EN 60529 IEC/EN 61131-2, EN50178, IEC/EN 60529 41 x 20 x 59 41 x 20 x 71 41 x 20 x 71 9 General Standards Dimensions (W x H x L) reference only mm 41 x 20 x 59 Weight g / oz 65 / 2.3 65 / 2.3 85 / 3.
9.
9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Machine Mount I/O Modules, continued Description Unit EU1E-SWD-2DX EU1E-SWD-2DD EU2E-SWD-4DX EU2E-SWD-4DD Y/N Yes Yes Yes Yes Galvanic isolation of I/O circuitry Y/N No No No No Operating power per connection A 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Internally power limited (PTC) Y/N Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 9 I/O Configurations 24 Vdc bus power to I/O devices 9 9 Overload threshold per connection A 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.
9.
9.
9.1 9 9 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution SWD Accessories, continued Description Unit IP67 Tee (Single) Plug/Cap Cabinet Entry M12 Cabinet Exit M12 Mounting EU1S-SWD-PF1-2 SWD4-RC5-10 SWD4-ACAP-10 SWD4-SML8-12 SWD4-SFL8-12 SWD4-MNT-VER SWD4-MNT-DIN 1x M12-F / 5-pole — — 1x Lumberg (LT-307.597.
9.
9.1 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Contactor Modules Description Unit DIL-SWD-32-001 DIL-SWD-32-002 PKE-SWD-32 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 60947 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 60947 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 60947 General Standards 9 9 Dimensions (W x H x D) in (mm) 1.77 x 1.50 x 3.0 (45 x 38 x 76) 1.77 x 1.50 x 3.0 (45 x 38 x 76) 1.77 x 1.50 x 3.0 (45 x 38 x 76) 9 Weight lbs (kg) 0.9 (0.04) 0.9 (0.04) 0.9 (0.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.
9.1 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Pilot Device Modules Description Unit M22-SWD-K11 M22-SWD-KC11 M22-SWD-LED-_ M22-SWD-LEDC-_ M22-SWD-K11-LED_ IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 0.47 x 1.65 x 1.54 (12 x 42 x 39) 0.47 x 1.77x 1.46 (12 x 45 x 37) 0.39 x 1.65 x 1.77 (10 x 42 x 45) 0.39 x 1.77 x 1.65 (10 x 45 x 42) 0.47 x 1.65 x 1.
9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Pilot Device Modules, continued Description Unit M22-SWD-K11LEDC-_ M22-SWD-K22 M22-SWD-KC22 M22-SWD-K22-LED_ M22-SWD-K22LEDC-_ IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 General Standards 9 9 9 Dimensions (W x H x D) in (mm) 0.47 x 1.77 x 1.65 (12 x 45 x 42) 0.67 x 1.65 x 1.54 (17 x 42 x 39) 0.67 x 1.77 x 1.46 (17 x 45 x 37) 0.
9.1 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Stacklight Modules—SL4/SL7 Series SL4/SL7 General Specifications Description Specification 9 Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Lens color Blue, green, red, clear, yellow, amber 9 Number of signal elements Max. 5 with standard base Max.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.
9.1 9 Dimensions 9 Gateways 9 EU5C-SWD_ Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 9 9 9 3.54 (90.0) 9 9 9 9 0.18 (4.5) 1.38 (35.0) 4.80 (122.0) 9 9 Powerfeed Modules EU5C-SWD-PF_ 9 9 9 9 3.54 (90.0) 9 9 9 9 0.18 (4.5) 1.38 (35.0) 9 I/O Modules 9 EU5E-SWD_ 4.72 (120.0) 9 9 9 3.54 (90.0) 9 9 9 9 0.18 (4.5) 1.38 (35.0) 3.82 (97.
9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Terminating Resistor Coupling SWD4-RC8-10 SWD4-8SFF2-5 9 9 9 0.16 (4.0) 9 0.16 (4.0) 9 1.91 (48.4) 1.91 (48.4) 9 9 9 1.02 (25.9) 9 1.02 (25.9) 1.35 (34.3) 0.40 (10.2) 1.35 (34.3) 0.40 (10.2) 9 Enclosure Bushing Plug Enclosure Bushing Socket 9 SWD4-SM8-20 SWD4-SF8-20 9 M20 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 Ø 0.94 (24.0) Ø 0.94 (24.0) 9 9 0.12 (3.0) 0.95 (24.0) 0.12 (3.0) 0.
9.1 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Panel Cable Adapter SWD4-8FRF-10 9 9 9 3.54 (90.0) 9 9 9 9 1.38 (35.0) 0.91 (23.2) 9 1.42 (36.0) 9 9 Round Cable Socket Round Cable Plug SWD4-SF8-67 SWD4-SM8-67 9 M16 x 0.75 9 Ø 0.73 (18.5) 9 9 Ø 0.73 (18.5) 1.77 (45.0) 1.75 (44.5) 9 9 Right Angle Round Cable Socket Right Angle Round Cable Plug SWD4-SF8-67W SWD4-SM8-67W 9 9 9 Ø 0.71 (18.0) 1.47 (37.4) Ø 0.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 9 Contactor Modules 9 DIL-SWD-32-001 and DIL-SWD-32-002 9 9 1.50 (38.0) 9 9 1.77 (45.0) 9 2.10 (53.1) 2.85 (72.3) 9 9 SmartWire-DT PKE Modules PKE-SWD-32 9 9 1.54 (39.0) 9 9 9 2.41 (61.1) 1.77 (45.0) 9 3.17 (80.6) Pilot Device Modules 9 M22-SWD-K_, M22-SWD-LED_ 9 9 9 1.73 (44.0) 9 2.52 (64.0) 9 1.18 (30.
9.1 9 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Stacklight Modules SL7-SWD, SL4-SWD SL7-SWD 1 SL7-FMS-… SL4-SWD 1 SL4-FMS-… 9 9 9 9 A A 9 6.18 (157.0) 7.56 (192.0) 9 9 9 9 Ø3.15 (Ø80.0) Ø3.15 (Ø80.0) Ø3.15 (Ø80.0) Ø3.15 (Ø80.0) 9 9 9 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Catalog Number A Catalog Number A SL7-FMS-100 7.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 9 T Connectors 9 Single T Connector 3.37 (85.6) 9 2.30 (58.4) 9 9 9 2.24 (56.9) 9 1.62 (41.1) 9 0.77 (19.6) 1.26 (32.0) 0.19 (4.7) 9 4X 0.33 (8.4) 2X Ø0.17 (4.3) 9 9 0.15 (3.8) 9 0.79 (20.1) 9 9 Dual T Connector 3.86 (98.0) 9 1.48 (37.7) 9 9 9 2.24 (56.9) 1.62 (41.1) 0.19 (4.7) 2X Ø0.17 (4.3) 9 9 0.77 (19.6) 1.26 (32.0) 2.80 (71.1) 9 4X 0.33 (8.4) 9 9 0.
9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Powerfeed T Connector 9 3.37 (85.6) 2.30 (58.4) 9 9 9 9 2.09 (53.1) 1.62 (41.1) 9 0.77 (19.6) 9 9 9 0.19 (4.7) 2X Ø0.17 (4.3) 1.28 (32.0) 4X 0.33 (8.4) 0.15 (3.8) 0.79 (20.1) 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 V7-T9-68 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2015 www.eaton.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 9 Panel Adapters 9 SWD4-SFL8-12 9 Recommended Mounting Hole Ø0.63 (Ø16.0) 0.83 (21.0) 1.38 (35.2) 9 M12 x 1 Internal Threads 0.55 (14.1) 9 9 M15 x 1.5 9 3.24 (82.4) 9 9 9 SWD4-SML8-12 9 Recommended Mounting Hole Ø0.63 (Ø16.0) 0.83 (21.0) 9 1.38 (35.2) 0.55 (14.1) 9 M12 x 1 9 M15 x 1.5 9 3.24 (82.4) 9 9 9 9 SWD4-SML5-12 0.50 (12.0) 0.29 (7.5) 9 1.00 (25.0) 9 0.
9.1 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Receptacles SWD4-PRM5-1-S 9 9 0.13 (3.4) 9 9 1.13 (28.7) M12 x 1 9 9 0.22 (5.5) 9 9 9 0.62 (15.7) 1.00 (25.4) 39.4–0/+2 (1000–0/+50) 18 AWG 1/2-14 NPT 0.43 (10.9) 0.394 ±0.06 (10 ±1.5) 9 3 4 5 9 9 1 Orientation of Connector within Shell is Random 2 SWD4-PRM5-2-S 9 0.11 (2.8) 0.94 (23.9) 9 9 9 M12 x 1 0.35 (9.0) 5.00 ±0.25 (127.0 ±6.4) 9 9 0.94 (24.0) 0.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 9 SWD4-PRF5-1-S 9 9 9 0.13 (3.4) 9 1.13 (28.7) 9 M12 x 1 9 39.4–0/+2 (1000–0/+50) 9 1.00 (25.4) 0.61 (15.5) 18 AWG 0.394 ±0.062 (10 ±1.5) 1/2-14 NPT 0.45 (11.4) 9 9 3 4 5 1 Orientation of Connector within Shell is Random 2 9 SWD4-PRF5-2-S 9 0.11 (2.8) 9 0.94 (23.9) 9 9 M12 x 1 9 0.71 (18.0) 0.40 (10.2) 9 5.00 ±0.25 (127.0 ±6.4) 9 0.94 (24.0) 18 AWG 0.12 (3.
9.1 9 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Mounting Brackets SWD4-MNT-VER 0.35 (9.0) 0.17 (4.2) 9 9 9 9 9 0.55 (14.0) 0.39 (10.0) 9 1.16 (29.5) 1.19 (30.3) 9 9 Black Plastic 0.76 (19.4) 0.63 (16.0) SWD4-MNT-DIN 8–18 x 1.0 Sheet Metal Screws 9 9 9 9 9 0.79 (20.0) Top Hat Rail EN 50022—35 x 7.5 9 9 9 9 9 1.00 (25.4) 0.11 (2.75) 0.98 (25.0) 9 0.99 (25.0) 0.39 (10.0) G-Type Rail 1.69 (43.0) 0.75 (19.0) 0.
9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 9 Splitters SWD4-SP-4122 9 SWD4-SP-3084 9 M12 x 1 Internal Threads 9 1.31 (33.3) 0.60 (15.3) 1 2.12 (53.8) 9 0.64 (16.3) 2 M8 x 1 Internal Threads 0.33 (8.4) 0.73 (18.5) 0.67 (17.1) 9 9 1.85 (47.0) 0.73 (18.5) 9 0.79 (20.0) 0.79 (20.0) 9 M12 x 1 1.24 (31.4) 9 M12 x 1 0.58 (14.7) 9 1.24 (31.4) 0.58 (14.7) 9 9 SWD4-SP-4124 9 M12 x 1 Internal Threads 9 9 1.
9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Other SWD4-SP-4082 9 SWD4-RC5-10 9 9 M8 x 1 Internal Threads 9 0.33 (8.4) 0.73 (18.5) 0.67 (17.1) 9 0.63 (16.0) 1.85 (47.0) 9 1.01 (25.6) M12 x 1 0.79 (20.0) 9 M12 x 1 9 0.79 (20.0) 0.58 (14.7) 9 1.24 (31.4) 9 9 1.62 (41.1) SWD4-ACAP-10 SWD4-SP-4084 9 9 M12 x 1 9 M8 x 1 Internal Threads 9 9 0.33 (8.4) 0.73 (18.5) 0.67 (17.1) 0.79 (20.0) 9 1.92 (48.
Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT In-Panel and On-Machine Wiring Solution 9.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 9 SWD4-SF5-67 9 Screw Terminals for Wire Termination 9 9 9 M12 x 1 Female Thread 9 2.20 (56.0) 9 9 Ø0.80 (Ø20.0) 9 9 V-12NPT 9 9 1/2 in x 14 NPT 9 9 Tool Size 0.94+0/–0.04 (24.0+0/–1.0) 9 9 Cable Diameter 0.118–0.280 (3.0–7.0) 0.59 ±0.08 (15.0 ±2.0) 9 1.03 ±0.08 (26.0 ±2.
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008 Contents Eaton Terms & Conditions Description Page Terms and Conditions of Sale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms of Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008 Prices All prices are subject to change without notice. In the event of a price change, the effective date of the change will be the date of the new price or discount sheet, letter or telegram. All quotations made or orders accepted after the effective date will be on the new basis. For existing orders, the price of the unshipped portion of an order will be the price in effect at time of shipment.
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008 Freight Warranty Freight policy will be listed on the Product discount sheets, or at option of Seller one of the following freight terms will be quoted. Risk of Loss Risk of loss or damage to the Products shall pass to Buyer at the F.O.B. point. F.O.B.—P/S—Frt./Ppd. and Invoiced Products are sold F.O.B. point of shipment freight prepaid and invoiced to the Buyer. Concealed Damage Except in the event of F.O.B.
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008 Extended Warranty for Products If requested by the Buyer and specifically accepted in writing by Seller, the foregoing standard warranty for Products will be extended from the date of shipment for the period and price indicated below: ● ● ● 24 months—2% of Contract Price 30 months—3% of Contract Price 36 months—4% of Contract Price Special Warranty (In and Out) for Products If requested by the Buyer and specifically accepted in writin
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008 Returning Products Authorization and shipping instructions for the return of any Products must be obtained from Seller before returning the Products. When return is occasioned due to Seller error, full credit including all transportation charges will be allowed.
Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index A D V7-T5-17 DIL-SWD . . . . . . V7-T9-14 AR . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-154 D1RA . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-54 ARA . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-155 D1RF . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-54 ARC . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-154 D15C . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-143 ARD. . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-154, V7-T3-155 D2PA . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-60 V7-T3-155 D2PJ . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-60, V7-T3-116 D2PR . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-59 APP . . . . . . . . . . . ARM . . .
Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index ES4P . . . . . . . . . . EU4A-RJ45 . . . . . EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . E01 . . . . . . . . . . . E10 . . . . . . . . . . . E10E . . . . . . . . . . E10P . . . . . . . . . . E10T . . . . . . . . . . E22B . . . . . . . . . . E22C . . . . . . . . . . E22L . . . . . . . . . . E26B . . . . . . . . . . E26S . . . . . . . . . . E26X . . . . . . . . . . E29K . . . . . . . . . . E30A . . . . . . . . . . E30B . . . . . . . . . . E30C . . . . . . . . . . E30D . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index M22-M . . . . . . . . V7-T1-117 M22M-D . . . . . . . V7-T1-53–V7-T1-71, V7-T1-94–V7-T1-97 M22M-W. . . . . . . V7-T1-80–V7-T1-91 M22-P . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-51, V7-T1-75–V7-T1-77 M22-R . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-106, V7-T1-107 M22S-B . . . . . . . . V7-T1-117 M22S-D . . . . . . . . V7-T1-53–V7-T1-71, V7-T1-94–V7-T1-97, V7-T1-99, V7-T1-100, V7-T1-103 M22S-R . . . . . . . . V7-T1-106, V7-T1-117 M22S-S . . . . . . . . V7-T1-114, V7-T1-115 M22S-T . . . . .
Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index V V-M20 . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-116, V7-T9-10 XBMU . . . . . . . . V7-T8-29, V7-T8-102 VS . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-40 XBMX. . . . . . . . . V7-T8-102 XBMZ. . . . . . . . .
Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index Numerics 10250T5. . . . . . . 10250ED . . . . . . . V7-T1-18, V7-T1-19, V7-T1-188, V7-T1-190, V7-T1-191, V7-T1-197, V7-T1-199, V7-T1-204, V7-T1-207, V7-T1-212, V7-T1-226, V7-T1-228, V7-T1-239, V7-T1-287, V7-T1-349 10250T6. . . . . . . 10250H . . . . . . . . V7-T1-18–V7-T1-20, V7-T1-23, V7-T1-27 10250T . . . . . . . . V7-T1-269 10250TA . . . . . . . V7-T1-189, V7-T1-190, V7-T1-217, V7-T1-225–V7-T1-229, V7-T1-240, V7-T1-279, V7-T1-280, V7-T1-288 10250T8. . . .
Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index 41-78 . . . . . . . . . . 42-26 . . . . . . . . . . 49-34 . . . . . . . . . . 49-35 . . . . . . . . . . 4977 . . . . . . . . . . 52-11 . . . . . . . . . . 52-12 . . . . . . . . . . 52-91 . . . . . . . . . . 53-11 . . . . . . . . . . 53-12 . . . . . . . . . . 53-13 . . . . . . . . . . 53-31 . . . . . . . . . . 54-12 . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index A Accessories ELC Series PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-14 M22 and Commercial Control Stations . . V7-T1-111–V7-T1-117 Power Distribution Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-126 Pushbutton Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-111–V7-T1-117 M22 and Commercial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-23 Pushbuttons 10250T 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index easySafety Relays and Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-199–V7-T3-204 Eaton Terms & Conditions Freight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitation of Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms and Conditions of Sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms of Payment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index M M22 Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-16 Machine Tool Relays Accessories AR/ARD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D15 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR/ARD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BF/BFD Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D15 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index Pushbutton Components, M22 Illuminated Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index S T Selector Switch Components Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-85, V7-T1-86 Non-Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-81–V7-T1-83 Terminal Blocks IDC (Insulation Displacement Connection) . V7-T8-67–V7-T8-81 Miniature Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-82–V7-T8-89 NEMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-106–V7-T8-115 C381 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index XP and XV Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-21 XP and XV Operator Interface with Visual Designer Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-26 XP Operator Interface Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-22 XP with Visual Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-21 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .